JP2023001252A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's attention to a game.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes an upper actuation port 36 and a lower actuation port 37 for executing an internal lottery when a game ball enters therein, a right-side variable ball entry mechanism 40 in which a game ball shot toward a right-shooting route can enter therein on the basis of the result of the internal lottery, and game state shift means for shifting a game state from a normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 40. The game state includes a first time-saving state to be an advantageous situation to the player by shooting a game ball toward the right-shooting route and a second time-saving state to be a disadvantageous situation to the player as compared to the first time-saving state by shooting a game ball toward the right-shooting route.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. and is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player plays in anticipation of transition to the high-frequency support mode.
In addition, as one type of such gaming machine, a game equipped with a variable ball entry mechanism that allows a game ball to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. machine is known.
This game machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game state transition means is provided for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
The high-frequency support mode is more advantageous for the player than the first game state because it becomes easier for the player to enter the variable ball-entering mechanism.

JP 2011-235036 A

However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of a player to a game.

The gaming machine of the present invention comprises a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area entering the game area, and an internal lottery performed when the game ball enters the game area. and game state transition means for shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery, wherein the starting ball entry means includes a first start ball entry section and a first start ball entry section. A second starting ball-entering part different from the ball-entering part is provided, and the game area easily causes the game ball to enter the first starting ball-entering part, and the game ball to enter the second starting ball-entering part. and a second route that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering section and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering section. , and the game state includes a first time-saving state in which the player is in an advantageous situation by shooting the game ball toward the second path, and shooting the game ball toward the second path. A second time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the first time-saving state is provided by the game machine, and the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Based on the result, a variable ball entry mechanism is provided for allowing the game ball launched toward the second path to enter, and the game state transition means causes the player to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry mechanism. It is characterized by shifting the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state that is advantageous for.

Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present invention, a gaming machine can increase the attention of a player to a game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; front view of game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism Figure showing the display screen of the pattern display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an electric right/wrong table that stores random number values for winning electric power opening A diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a winning event A diagram showing a distribution table that stores random number values related to distribution destinations of winning types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode A diagram showing a flowchart of variable ball entry processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation end processing Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination processing for the opening/closing execution mode A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing the effect for the game round when the game ball enters the lower operation opening with the winning of the through gate as the trigger in the high-frequency support mode. Enlarged view showing the periphery of the right variable ball entry mechanism A diagram showing the effect for the opening and closing execution mode when the game ball wins the right ball entrance (V win) A diagram showing the effect for the game round when staying in the special mode A diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the second embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination processing for the opening/closing execution mode A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing the effect for the opening and closing execution mode when the game ball wins the right ball entrance (V win) A diagram showing the effect for the game round when staying in the special mode A diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the third embodiment of the present invention. Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation end processing A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination processing for the opening/closing execution mode A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing the effect for the opening and closing execution mode when the game ball wins the right ball entrance (V win) A diagram showing the effect for the game round when staying in the special mode A diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing a flowchart of the number-of-games counter setting process A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination processing for the opening/closing execution mode A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing the effect for the opening and closing execution mode when the game ball wins the right ball entrance (V win) A diagram showing the effect for the game round when the game ball enters the lower operation opening with the winning of the through gate as the trigger in the high-frequency support mode.

[First embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward (front side). 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side, and an inner frame (not shown) disposed in front of the inner frame. A front door frame 13 supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side, and a front door frame 13 disposed behind the inner frame and rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

The gaming machine main body 12 has a locking device (not shown) provided at the leading end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by unlocking the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21 . In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be transparent and colorless.
In addition, the front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of light emitting means configured by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion A speaker unit 24 is provided on both the left and right sides of 23 and outputs sound effects according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21. there is

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are vertically arranged side by side and both are provided to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward, and a push button 25b that receives input of information when operated by the player. The upper tray 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 5) provided in the back pack unit, and aligns them in a row toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 5). It has the function of guiding. The push button 25b functions as an operating means for executing an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player when operated by the player.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 has a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower tray 26a. The shooting handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to shoot a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. do. The shooting handle 27 changes the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, ie, the momentum of shooting, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
The game board 31, as shown in FIG. 2, has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . Almost the entire area of this game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21 .
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 form a guide rail 34 for guiding game balls to the game area, and this guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 when the player rotates the shooting handle 27. The game ball that has been hit is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side of the side. In this embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning port 35 provided at each opening, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 36, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, and an out port 39 . In addition, the game board 31 includes a right variable ball entry mechanism 40 provided above the variable winning device 38, two through gates 41 provided on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, respectively, and a gate 41 provided on the upper right side. It has a main display device 42 and a variable display unit 43 and the like provided in the center. Furthermore, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 is provided with detection sensors 50a to 50d (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of game balls. The detection sensors 50a to 50d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 includes a detection sensor 50a, the upper operating opening 36 includes a detecting sensor 50b, the lower operating opening 37 includes a detecting sensor 50c, and the variable winning device 38 includes a detecting sensor 50d. It has The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50a to 50d. The detection sensors 50a to 50d may be of any type as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 35 . The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when a ball enters the lower operating port 37. - 特許庁The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 38.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

Out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of game board 31 . Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the out hole 39.例文帳に追加In addition, the out port 39 is provided with a detection sensor 50e (see FIG. 5) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out hole 39, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 50f (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and when the entry of a game ball occurs, an internal lottery is executed. The detection sensor 50f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each through gate 41, unlike the case where a ball enters a prize winning opening.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of game balls into the out port 39, entry of game balls into various winning ports is also expressed as winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 refers to continuing to flow down the game area without being ejected from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. A ball entering the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning a prize, like entering a ball into various winning holes.

The upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 are unitized as an operation port device and installed on the game board 31 . Each operating port 36, 37 is opened upward to allow the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged upward and the lower operating port 37 is arranged downward. are arranged vertically side by side. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory driving section 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer to the left and right. The open state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operation port 36 becomes narrower than one game ball. Also, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operation opening 36 becomes wider than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. can.

In addition, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state), and a lower It may be configured to switch between the operation port 37 and the state in which the game ball is likely to win. In addition, the lower operation port 37 may be configured to perform such switching not by setting the electric accessory 37a but by displacing the lower operation port 37. 37 may not include the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an open/close door 38b for opening and closing the large winning opening 38a, and an open/close door 38b. A variable winning drive unit 38c is provided.
The player hits to the right by maximizing the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side part side, it is possible to avoid the variable display unit 43 etc. and guide the game ball to the variable winning device 38, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, the lower operation opening 37, etc. (right hitting route ).

In addition, the player hits to the left with the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 27 set to a medium degree, and moves the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part of the game area is formed. By shifting to the upper left, the game ball can be guided to the upper working port 36, the lower working port 37, etc. (left-handed route).
Thus, in this embodiment, the game area is the first path (left a hitting route) and a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. .

Here, the game board 31 has a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38 . The cover 381 consists of a transparent (or translucent) panel 381a formed to make the variable winning device 38 visible from the front side, and an opaque panel 381a provided around the transparent panel 381a. and a panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window 21. FIG.

The big winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 50d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. 31, and an open state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. When the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
The right variable ball entry mechanism 40 includes, as shown in FIG. a guide passage 402 for guiding the game ball guided to the entrance of the guide passage 402, a switching portion 403 for switching the destination of the game ball guided by the guide passage 402, and a right ball entrance 404 provided at the guide destination of the guide passage 402. and left entrance 405 .

The guiding portion 401 includes a blade member 401a provided on the game board 31 so as to close an entrance formed on the right side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, and a blade member 401a centered on an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It has a pin 401b that rotatably supports the blade 401a, and a blade member driving section 401c that drives the blade member 401a.

The blade member 401a rotates counterclockwise around the pin 401b to be in a closed state (one-dot chain line in the figure) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is closed, and rotates clockwise around the pin 401b. It has an open state (solid line in the drawing) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is opened by moving. The blade member 401a is inclined so as to descend toward the inlet side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 in the open state.
The blade member driving section 401c sets the blade member 401a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the blade member 401a.

Therefore, when the blade member 401a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 401c, the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 through the blade member 401a using the inclination of the blade member 401a. (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member driving section 401c sets the blade member 401a to the closed state, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 (chain line in the figure).

The guide passage 402 is formed to have a width that does not allow a plurality of game balls to pass through the passage at the same time. Further, the guide passage 402 branches into two on the way, and has an upstream guide passage 402a positioned upstream of the branch and two downstream guide passages 402b and 402c positioned downstream. .

The upstream guide passage 402 a guides the game ball guided to the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 by the guiding portion 401 from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 to the branch position of the guide passage 402 . The upstream guide passage 402 a is inclined downward from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 toward the branch position of the guide passage 402 . Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 402 along the upstream guide passage 402a utilizing the inclination of the upstream guide passage 402a.

The downstream guide passage 402b is provided at a position close to the blade member 401a. Further, the downstream guide passage 402b is formed along the vertical direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 402. As shown in FIG. The downstream guide passage 402b guides the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 402 along the upstream guide passage 402a to the right ball entrance 404.例文帳に追加
The downstream guide passage 402c is provided at a position far from the blade member 401a. Further, the downstream guide passage 402c is formed along the vertical direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 402. As shown in FIG. The downstream guide passage 402 c guides the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 402 along the upstream guide passage 402 a to the left ball inlet 405 .

The switching unit 403 supports a plate 403a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 402b, and the plate 403a rotatably about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It has a pin 403b and a plate driving section 403c that drives the plate 403a.

The plate 403a rotates clockwise around the pin 403b, thereby closing the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402b (a two-dot chain line in the figure) and rotating counterclockwise around the pin 403b. As a result, the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402c is closed and the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402b is opened (solid line in the figure). In the closed state, the plate 403a is inclined downward toward the downstream guide passage 402c.
The plate driver 403c drives the plate 403a to set the plate 403a to either a closed state or an open state.

Therefore, when the plate 403a is set to the open state by the plate driving portion 403c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 is guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 402b, and then the right ball entrance. Enter the ball at 404 (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the plate 403a is set to the closed state by the plate driving portion 403c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 uses the inclination of the plate 403a to travel downstream through the plate 403a. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 402c, the ball enters the left ball entry hole 405 (two-dot chain line in the figure).

The right ball entrance 404 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. This right ball entrance 404 is equipped with a detection sensor 50g for detecting the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the right ball slot 404, unlike when a ball enters the various winning slots.

The left ball entrance 405 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. A game ball that has entered the left ball inlet 405 joins the game ball that has passed through the outlet 39 and is discharged from the game area. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the left ball hole 405, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Since the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when a ball is entered into the right ball entrance 404, the downstream guide passage 402b that guides the game ball to the right ball entrance 404 is equipped with an opening/closing execution mode. A letter "V" is displayed to indicate that the mode is to be changed.
In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the opening/closing execution mode when a ball enters the left ball entrance 405, the downstream guide passage 402c that guides the game ball to the left ball entrance 405 includes: A character "x" is displayed to indicate that the opening/closing execution mode is not to be entered.

Here, the blade member 401a and the plate 403a are normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. Then, in the internal lottery, when the transition to the variable ball entry execution mode is won and the variable ball entry execution mode is entered, the blade member 401a and the plate 403a are set to an open state in which a game ball can win.
In the variable ball entry execution mode, the blade member 401a is set to the open state, the game ball can be entered into the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, the plate 403a is set to the open state or the closed state, and the right A mode in which a game ball can enter either the ball entrance 404 or the left ball entrance 405 . Further, in the variable ball-entering execution mode, the time (open period) from setting the plate 403a to the open state to setting it to the closed state again is set to the closed state after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. It is shorter than the time (open period) until it opens.
Specifically, the open period of the plate 403a is about 1/10 of the open period of the blade member 401a.

The main display device 42, as shown in FIG. It is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 . Also, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42 .

The main display portion 45 includes a first result display portion 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower working port 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 5). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 36. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. to display the results of If the result of this internal lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the variable-entering execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the variable ball entry execution mode. Further, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when a ball enters the right ball entrance 404 in the variable ball entry execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 function as starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. do.

The character object display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric operation open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and character object display unit 46 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited to this, and may be liquid crystal display devices, organic EL display devices, CRTs, It may also consist of other types of display devices such as dot matrix. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 51 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 52 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 51 . The upper part of the center frame 52 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display.
This symbol display device 51 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 51 performs the variable display in the first result display portion 45a of the main display portion 45 and when the second result display portion 45b of the main display portion 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or other display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 52 includes a first holding lamp portion 53 provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 51, a second holding lamp portion 54 provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 51, and a pattern display. and a third holding lamp portion 55 provided in the upper region of the device 51 .

The first reservation lamp portion 53 is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The first holding lamp portion 53 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 51. FIG.
The second reservation lamp part 54 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp portion 54 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 51. FIG.

The third reservation lamp portion 55 is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp section 55 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display section 46 .
It should be noted that each of the holding lamp units 53 to 55 may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of the pattern display device 51. FIG.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device. Specifically, FIG. 4(A) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in the case of executing the variable display of the symbols triggered by the winning of the upper working port 36, and FIG. 4(B). 10] is a view showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the variable display of symbols is executed with the winning of the lower opening 37 as a trigger. [FIG.
As shown in FIG. 4, the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is divided into three columns of display areas. Column Z3 is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 4, the center line of each display area is shown by the dashed-dotted line.

When the variable display of the pattern is executed with the winning of the upper working port 36 as a trigger, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 consists of numbers "1" to "8" as shown in FIG. 4(A). Eight kinds of patterns are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and are arranged such that "1" follows "8".
When the variable display of the pattern is executed with the winning of the lower opening 37 as a trigger, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 consists of alphabetical letters "A" to "C" as shown in FIG. 4(B). The three types of patterns are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and are arranged such that "A" follows "C".
Therefore, by looking at the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, the player can confirm whether the variable display of the pattern is executed with the winning of any of the upper and lower working ports 36 and 37 as a trigger. can do.

The symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game round is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L. end with a state
In other words, the game cycle refers to the period from when the variable display is started on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 based on the wins to the operation ports 36 and 37 until the predetermined stop result is displayed.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 51 is not limited to this, and the pattern display device 51 is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of pictures and numbers or letters instead of only numbers or letters, or may be pictures only.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a success/failure table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, an electric service success/failure table storage area 63c, and a reach table storage area 63d.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a pending ball storage area 64b, an electric power pending area 64c, and various flag storage areas 64d.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. Further, the output ports of the MPU 62 include an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. It is connected to the wing member drive section 401c that opens and closes the plate 401a, the plate drive section 403c that opens and closes the plate 403a, the main display section 45, and the accessory display section .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c to open and close the big winning opening 38a. In the variable ball-entering execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the blade member driving section 401c to open and close the blade member 401a, and executes drive control of the plate driving section 403c to open and close the plate 403a. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 50a to 50g are connected to the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, the right ball entrance 404, and each through gate 41. They are provided in one-to-one correspondence. The MPU 62 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) for various prize winning ports, the out port 39, the right ball entrance 404, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50a to 50g. In addition, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 .

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of a win, uses the type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the win, and reaches the lottery for whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display. Random number counter C3 is used. Also, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 51. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory open counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37 is set to the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 5).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 5) provided as acquired information storage means.

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a combination of the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in time series to each area Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the upper working port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the first result display portion reservation area Ra includes four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the upper operation opening 36 are reserved. In addition, the first result display reserved area Ra includes storage areas for writing the reserved numbers stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reservations related to the upper working port 36 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a combination of the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in time series to each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the lower opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the lower operation opening 37 are reserved. In addition, the second result display portion reservation area Rb includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41.例文帳に追加
Then, based on the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric accessory open lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of enabling game balls to enter the lower operation opening 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is low. and a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an electric right/wrong table that stores values of random numbers that win the electric right to open the electric power.
Among the values of the electric role item opening counter C4, the value of the random number that wins the occurrence of the electric role opening is stored in the electric role right/wrong table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 provided as the electric right/wrong information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (Refer to FIG. 5) is stored as an electric service right/wrong table (electric power right/wrong information group).

7A and 7B for the high-frequency support mode. It also includes an electric service acceptance table (high-frequency electric service acceptance information group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of the opening of the electric role by comparing these electric role right/wrong tables with the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer.

These electric right/wrong tables have results (right/wrong results of the electric right/wrong) of a plurality of occurrences of opening of the electric power, ie, "won an electric right" and "losing result".
Here, "Electrical work open winning" is the electric work success/failure result in which the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is placed in the electric work open state.

More specifically, in a game state in which the electric role success/failure table for the low-frequency support mode is referred to during the lottery for the occurrence of the electric role opening, as shown in FIG. There is one random number value. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery wins the electric role opening with a probability of 1/251.
In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, except for the value of the random number that becomes "Electrical role open winning", the electric role opening is not won and the result is "Loss result".

On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the electric role success/failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the electric role release, as shown in FIG. is 1.
Also, in the high-frequency support mode, any random number value other than the "outlier result" wins the occurrence of the electric power release and becomes the "electric power release result". In other words, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery wins the electric role opening with a probability of about 250/251.
In addition, the value and the number of random numbers stored in each electric role success/failure table are arbitrary. good.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper working opening 36 than the lower working opening 37 . In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will enter the lower operation opening 37 rather than the upper operation opening 36 is higher.
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state when the electric role opening is won, compared to the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, the high-frequency support mode is configured such that, when winning the electric role opening generation, the opening time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is longer than the low-frequency support mode. may Also, for example, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electrical open state is shortened compared to the low-frequency support mode. may be configured. In addition, for example, the high-frequency support mode is the minimum guaranteed time (1 The duration of the variable display of times) may be configured to be shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a short reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved times may be It may be configured to be shorter than in the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode changes the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Thus, in this embodiment, the low frequency support mode functions as a first game state in which the probability of hitting the upper working opening 36 is higher than the lower working opening 37 . In addition, the high frequency support mode is a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode because the probability of the ball entering the lower operation port 37 is higher than that of the upper operation port 36. Function.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . Also, the winning random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 like the winning random number counter C1.

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper working port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower working port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery (winning lottery) based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a success/failure table storing values of random numbers that are selected for winning.
Among the values of the winning random number counter C1, the values of the random numbers that are selected for winning are stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the winning/failure information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (whether or not information group).

The right/wrong table includes a first right/wrong table (first right/wrong information group) shown in FIG. 8(a) and a second right/wrong table (second right/wrong information group) shown in FIG. 8(b).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for winning (occurrence of a big win or occurrence of a small win) by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first success/failure table shows the value of the winning random number counter C1 shifted from the first result display section reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the winning random number counter C1 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36. This is a table that is referred to when performing a lottery for occurrence. In this first success/failure table, as shown in FIG. 8(a), there are two random number values of "7" and "77" for "jackpot win".
Also, there are 100 random number values of "100 to 199" for the "minor winning". In other words, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 36, the probability of winning a small prize is 1/6.
Furthermore, except for the values of random numbers that result in "big win winning" and "minor winning winning", the "normal result" is obtained without winning the big win.

The second success/failure table shows the value of the winning random number counter C1 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the winning random number counter C1 based on the winning to the lower opening 37. It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for winning. As shown in FIG. 8(b), this second success/failure table has 480 random number values "0 to 479" for "minor winning". In other words, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation opening 37, the probability of winning the "small win" is 4/5.
Here, the random number value for "big win" and "minor win" stored in the first success/failure table is included in the random number value for "small win" stored in the second success/failure table. there is

In addition, except for the value of the random number that becomes "small winning", it does not win small winning and becomes "normal loss result".
The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary. In addition, the random number value for the "small win win" stored in the second win/fail table does not include the random number value for the "big win win" and the "small win win" stored in the first win/fail table. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values for the "big win win" and the "minor win win" stored in the first success/fail table.

Here, "jackpot winning" is the success/fail result of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, "small win win" is the success/fail result of shifting to the variable entry execution mode. Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when a ball enters the right ball entrance 404 in the variable ball entry execution mode.
In the following description, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode due to the occurrence of a ball entering the right ball entrance 404 is also expressed as occurrence of a big win.

Here, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 36, the probability of winning a "small win" is 1/6, and as described above, the opening period of the plate 403a is the blade member Since it is about 1/10 of the opening period of 401a, the probability of shifting to the variable ball-entering execution mode when winning a prize in the upper operation port 36 and winning a big win is about 1/60.
In addition, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation opening 37, the probability of winning the "small winning" is 4/5, and as described above, the opening period of the plate 403a Since it is about 1/10 of the opening period of , the probability of shifting to the variable ball-entering execution mode when winning a prize in the lower operation port 37 and winning a big win is about 1/12.5.

Next, the hit type counter C2 will be described. For example, the hit type counter C2 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored in the first result display portion reservation area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, based on the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the winning type when a winning occurs.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values relating to distribution destinations of winning types.
As shown in FIG. 9, the values of the random numbers related to the distribution destination of the winning type are stored in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 9(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 9(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a winning type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is for the value of the winning type counter C2 shifted from the first result display section reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the winning type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36. It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for winning types.
As shown in FIG. 9A, the first distribution table includes "low-frequency support mode result (distribution result corresponding to low-frequency support mode)" and "high-frequency support mode result (distribution result corresponding to high-frequency support mode)". Result)” is set as a distribution destination. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the hit type counter C2, “0 to 14” are distributed to “low frequency support mode results”, and “15 to 29” are distributed to “high frequency support mode result”.
Therefore, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning in the upper operation port 36, the probability that the result will be "low frequency support mode result" is 50%, and the probability that it will be "high frequency support mode result" is also 50%. be.

In the second distribution table, the value of the winning type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the winning type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower opening 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for winning types.
As shown in FIG. 9B, the second distribution table includes "low-frequency support mode result (distribution result corresponding to low-frequency support mode)" and "high-frequency support mode result (distribution result corresponding to high-frequency support mode)". Result)” is set as a distribution destination. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the hit type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low frequency support mode results”, and “10 to 29” are distributed to “high frequency support mode result”.
Therefore, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower operation port 37, the probability of obtaining the "low-frequency support mode result" is about 33%, and the probability of obtaining the "high-frequency support mode result" is about 67%. %.

The "low-frequency support mode result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, except when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This low-frequency support mode continues until a jackpot occurs.
The "high frequency support mode result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36, and the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) to determine whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The ready-to-win display is an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in "big winning" or "minor winning" but results in "normal failure".
Specifically, the MPU 62 stores in the ready-to-win table and the reserved ball storage area 64b in the case where the winning lottery does not result in "big win winning" or "minor winning" and results in "normal loss". By comparing with the value of a ready-to-win random number counter C3, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display, and when the ready-to-win display is to be generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-win table is a table that stores random number values associated with the generation of the ready-to-win display, and is stored in the ready-to-win table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 (see FIG. 5).

Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the winning lottery and "high frequency support mode result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 51 has the same odd number as the stop result. A symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. - 特許庁Further, in the case of "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and "low frequency support mode result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 51 displays the symbols having the same even number as the stop result. are stopped on the effective line L. Furthermore, in the case of a "small winning lottery" in the winning lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the symbol display device 51, as a result of stopping, does not display a combination of symbols having the same number. , a combination of special symbols having different numbers which are not selected when a ``normal failure result'' is obtained in the success/fail lottery is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. - 特許庁In the case of a "small win" in the winning lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the symbol display device 51 displays the combination of symbols having the same alphabet as the effective line L as a result of the stop. Pause on top.

The ready-to-win display is performed when a combination of symbols having the same number or the same alphabetic character is finally stopped and displayed (when a "big win" is won in a lottery, or when a prize is entered in the lower operation port 37). In the case of "small winning" in the winning lottery), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, when the special symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed (when "small win" is won in the lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operation port 36), the reach display is performed. It does not occur regardless of the value of the random number counter C3.

In the ready-to-win display mode, some of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are displayed on the activated line L. By stopping and displaying, the same combination of symbols is displayed to indicate the result of stopping, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, by generating the ready-to-win display, the pachinko machine 10, after the start of the variable display on the pattern display device 51 and before displaying the predetermined stop result, "wins a big win" or "wins a small win" in the winning lottery. The player can be made to expect that he or she has won the prize.

Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected performance as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 51. - 特許庁The expected performance means that after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 51 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, it is assumed that "big win" or "small win" is won in the winning lottery. It means a performance that makes people expect. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-win display and advance notice display.

The notice display is better than the case where the "big hit" or "small hit" is won in the lottery, and the "normal result" is obtained without becoming the "big hit" or "small hit" in the lottery. is also an expectation production that makes it easier for production to occur. Instead of facilitating the occurrence of effects, this advance notice display may facilitate the selection of effects with a low appearance rate, or may be combined.
While the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display is performed by the main control device 60, the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The mode of the advance notice display is that of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and some of the symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z1) is stopped on the activated line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed or ready-to-win display is generated, a predetermined character etc. are displayed on the display screen G as moving images. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is
Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display duration time on the main display section 45 and the pattern display duration time on the pattern display device 51 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, judges the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 50a to 50d corresponding to various winning ports detect the winning of the game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is the specific unit number to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if it reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product opening counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Note that the MPU 62 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, if the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service reservation area 64c. Also, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp portion 55 and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 lights the third reservation lamp unit 55 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the third reservation lamp portion 55 is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the working opening. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the timer interrupt processing.
The prize winning process for the operating port will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 50b corresponding to the upper operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has entered the upper operating port 36 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won in the upper working port 36, in step S202, the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra is grasped, and the reserved number is determined. The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display section reservation area Ra as the first start-up reservation storage number RaN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 50c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has not entered the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, it ends the operation opening winning process. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as a second start pending storage number RbN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 checks in step S205 if the number of starting suspension memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not there is
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start suspension memory number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the operation port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the value of the start pending memory number N and updates it in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores the set of values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the free storage area of the reserved area for the result display section. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, each of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. A set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first result display portion pending area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S206.
For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 stores "4" in the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process are stored as suspension information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display section storage area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension storage number RbN updated in step S206. do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first reservation lamp section 53 or the second reservation lamp section 54, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the first reservation lamp section 53 or the second reservation lamp section 54 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In addition, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 or the lower operation opening 37 is a maximum of 4, and the first reservation lamp part 53 or the second reservation lamp part 54 has this reservation number The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Run.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70 Send. Also, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether commands for effects such as commands corresponding to effects for game times, effects for variable ball-entering execution modes, and commands corresponding to effects for opening/closing execution modes are set. When it is determined that a command for effect is set, the command for effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. - 特許庁

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . In addition, when the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes a win/fail lottery and a distribution lottery, determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 51, and determines the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. decision of information related to
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as the opening/closing execution mode, the variable ball-entering execution mode, the low-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode.
The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round has ended. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is set to 3 seconds and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, and when it reaches 750 times, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. In addition, when the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S<b>306 , the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided in the lower working port 37 . In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 . Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes game ball launch control processing. In this game ball shooting control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply/shooting control device 80 to execute shooting control for shooting a game ball based on the rotation of the shooting handle 27 by the player. Specifically, the power supply/shooting control device 80 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 . Further, the power supply/shooting control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64 or not. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 . The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing of step S312 and subsequent steps without executing the processing of step S309 and subsequent steps. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, MPU62 prohibits the access to RAM64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag has not been set, in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether the current normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet arrived, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311. , the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeats steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred, the next normal process is executed by executing step S301 again. Begin normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to become operable. ) has passed.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not passed in step S402, it repeats the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has passed in step S402, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the processing of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, MPU62 permits the access to RAM64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
At step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated at step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (power failure processing) of the normal processing, and if they match, , the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the processing from step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411, and timer interrupt in step S412. Allow the process to occur, and shift to the above-described normal process.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502, the main display section 45 determines whether the variable display is being performed, that is, the game round is in progress. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game cycle progressing process in steps S506 to S509.

First, the processing for starting a game round in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these numbers of reservations is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area A data setting process is executed to set the pending information stored in Rb for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", it executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section of steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the upper operation opening 36 The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion pending area Ra to update the value.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 45, out of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b, starts the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working hole 36. indicates that the

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp section 53 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the first reservation lamp portion 53 as the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 decreases.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37. indicates that the

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp section 54 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the second reservation lamp portion 54 as the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S717 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 36 starts the variable display. Therefore, in step S702, the first right/wrong table (see FIG. 8(a)) is read from the right/wrong table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S701, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 , the second right/wrong table (see FIG. 8(b)) is read from the right/wrong table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. In this success/failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success/failure table read out in step S702 or S703 to obtain the result of the success/failure lottery (result of success/failure). judge. In addition, as mentioned above, the winning result is either "jackpot winning", "minor winning", or "normal result", and even if the support mode is low frequency support mode The same is true even if there is

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning result determined in step S704 is a winning occurrence ("big winning winning" or "small winning winning"). If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the result of winning is that a win has occurred, the MPU 62 executes the processes from step S706 onward, and if it determines that the result of winning in step S705 is that a win has not occurred, then steps S714 and after. process.

First, the processing (processing after step S706) when the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the winning result is the occurrence of winning will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 36 starts a variable display. Therefore, the first distribution table (see FIG. 9A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S707.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 , the second sorting table (see FIG. 9B) is read from the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S708.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU62 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this allocation determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the win type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the allocation table read out in step S707 or step S708, thereby determining the result of the allocation lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "big hit".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S710 that the win/loss result is "big win winning", in step S711, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the big win result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 45a of the main display portion 45 according to the allocation result determined in step S709. and stores the determined information in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 compares the allocation result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and displays the final result on the first result display portion 45a of the main display portion 45. Information relating to a pattern to be displayed in a static manner is determined. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 so as to be different for each sorting result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the win/loss result is not "big win winning" in step S710 (if it determines that the win/loss result is "small win winning"), in step S712, the small win result Execute the stop result setting process for In this stop result setting process for small winning results, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 45a or the second result display portion 45b of the main display portion 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for small winning results stored in advance in the ROM 63, and finally stops and displays on the first result display portion 45a or the second result display portion 45b of the main display portion 45. Determines information related to the pattern to be drawn.

After executing the process of step S711 or step S712, the MPU 62 sets a flag corresponding to the sorting result determined in step S709 in the RAM 64 in step S713. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is the "low-frequency support mode result", it sets the low-frequency support mode result flag to indicate that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result". If specified, the high frequency support mode result flag is set. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S715.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the processing (processing after step S714) when the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the hit/fail result does not occur will be described.
In step S714, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stopping result setting process for the out-of-ordinary result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to a stop result table for out-of-normal results stored in advance in the ROM 63 to determine information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the normal outlier result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the big win result and the stop result table for the small win result.

After executing any of the processes of steps S711, S712, and S714, the MPU 62 executes display duration time (display duration) setting processing in step S715.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 .

In addition, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated on the pattern display device 51 . Specifically, when the winning result determined in step S704 is "big win winning", the MPU 62 determines that the winning result determined in step S704 is "small win winning" based on the winning to the lower operation opening 37. , or when the success/failure result determined in step S704 is "normal failure result" and winning the reach generation lottery, it is determined that the reach display occurs. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Run a reach generation lottery.

When determining that the reach display occurs, the MPU 62 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63 d of the ROM 63, so that the fluctuation type counter obtained from the fluctuation type counter buffer A display continuation time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, so that the fluctuation acquired from the fluctuation type counter buffer A display continuation time corresponding to the value of the type counter CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. Therefore, the display continuation time for consuming the pending information related to the upper working port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the upper working port 36 increases. Further, the display duration time when the pending information related to the lower working port 37 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the lower working port 37 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the pending number is the same, the display duration time in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as increasing the display duration as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and support mode It may be configured so that it does not fluctuate. Alternatively, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

At step S716, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S301 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the command for variation and the type command set in step S716 to the sound emission control device 90. FIG.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

The variation command includes information related to display duration. Also, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information on the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

The type command includes information related to the win/fail result. In other words, the type command includes each information related to "big hit winning", "minor winning winning", and "normal failure result" as information related to win/fail results. Also, the type command includes information related to sorting results. In other words, the type command includes each information related to the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result" as the information related to the sorting result.
In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command contains information about the game result.

In step S717, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first Since it indicates that the result display section 45a is to start the variable display, the first result display section 45a is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the second Since it indicates that the result display section 45b is to start the variable display, the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S715 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 controls the display of the main display section 45 so that the main display section 45 displays the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during the variable display. Note that the fluctuation end processing will be described later in detail.

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is being cheated to behave in the same manner as when winning a lottery for generating a big win. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 instead of the main display section 45 to determine whether or not he or she has won the winning lottery. , the degree of attention to the display screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S820 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S811.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable entry execution mode is in progress.
It should be noted that the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable entry execution mode is on by referring to the variable entry execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the variable entering execution mode flag when shifting to the variable entering execution mode, and clears the variable entering execution mode flag when ending the variable entering execution mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable ball entry execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S803.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable ball-entering execution mode is in effect, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S816.

First, the processing (processing after step S803) when it is determined in step S802 that the MPU 62 is not in the variable entry execution mode will be described.
In step S803, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the variable display of the main display unit 45 has ended, in step S804, the winning result is a win ("big win" or "small win"). It is determined whether or not.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the hit/fail result is not a hit, it ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is the occurrence of a hit, it determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "small win" in step S805.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the win/loss result is "small hit winning", in step S806, after setting the flag during the variable entry execution mode in the RAM 64, the game state transition processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the win/loss result is not "small win" (if it determines that the win/loss result is "big win"), in step S807, the RAM 64 is opened and closed. After setting the running mode flag, the process from step S808 is executed.

At step S808, the MPU 62 sets "15" to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the open/close execution mode ends under the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number

In step S809, the MPU 62 sets "1000" to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this way, the MPU 62 sets the wait time for opening to the timer counter T in step S809 regardless of the type of sorting result. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of sorting result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of distribution result to such an extent that the players recognize the same.
Also, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the distribution result of the "low-frequency support mode result" and the distribution result of the "high-frequency support mode result". , it may be configured such that it is greatly different depending on the type of sorting result.

At step S810, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the distribution result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the processing (processing after step S811) when it is determined that the MPU 62 is in the opening/closing execution mode in step S801 will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 62 executes a big winning opening opening/closing process.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S916 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the big winning opening 38a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the big winning opening 38a is open in step S901, it executes the processing after step S906.

First, in step S901, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is not open will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it determines in step S903 whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. judge.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S904, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
The special winning opening opening process of step S904 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1003 as shown in FIG.
At step S1001, "8" is set to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and "15000" is set to the timer counter T at step S1002. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

In step S1003, the MPU 62 executes processing for opening the big winning opening 38a.
In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1001 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1002 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration time is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing period of the game balls. Winning 38a is easy.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S905 will be explained with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S905 after executing the big winning opening opening process in step S904. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S905 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S906) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is being opened in step S901 will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1002 of the big winning opening opening process has passed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S907.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S910.

In step S907, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special prize opening 38a. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 38a, in step S908, the value of the prize winning counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S909, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, or if it determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less , in step S910, a closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c.

In step S911, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S912, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.
In step S913, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S914. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S914 is the open standby time from when the open/close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state again. stipulates the time. In addition, in this embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S915.
In step S915, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of sorting result, like the waiting time for the opening.
Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of sorting result to such an extent that the players recognize the same.
Also, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the "low-frequency support mode result" distribution result and the "high-frequency support mode result" distribution result. , it may be configured such that it is greatly different depending on the type of sorting result.

At step S916, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S916 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S812 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S811, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less in step S812.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, it determines in step S813 whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S814 the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared.
In step S815, the MPU 62 executes transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1108 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), The process after step S1105 is executed.
First, processing (processing after step S1102) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" will be described.

At step S1102, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in RAM 64 is cleared.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes with different support modes to be shifted to after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal mode in which the support mode is set after the end of the opening and closing execution mode according to the distribution result of the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result", and the "low frequency support Mode Result” and “High Frequency Support Mode Result” have a special mode as a game mode in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution result.

The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which game mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, the game mode is set to the normal mode.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1105) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" will be described.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), in step S1105, It is determined whether a special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 or not.

When the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (when it determines that the game mode is the special mode), it executes the processing after step S1102 described above. In other words, when the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 switches the support mode to high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, regardless of the result of distributing the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result." Set to support mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S1106, it is stored in the RAM 64. clear the high-frequency support flag. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

At step S1107, the MPU 62 sets a special mode flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the special mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.
At step S1108, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "30". After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until 30 games, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when 30 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In addition, after executing the process of step S1108, the MPU 62 clears the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37 .

In this way, when a win occurs in the winning lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "high frequency support mode result", the game state is the open/close execution mode regardless of the current game state. After completion, transition to high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without winning in the winning lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

Also, if a hit occurs in the winning lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is "low frequency support mode result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode if the game mode is a special mode. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode, and if the game mode is the normal mode, it shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without winning in the winning lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low-frequency support mode continues at least until a win occurs in the winning lottery. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, when no win occurs in the lottery, that is, when the result of the lottery is "normal result", the game state does not shift.

Here, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is included in the variation command described above. In addition, information relating to the game mode (information relating to whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the aforementioned opening command.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S816 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable entry execution mode is on, and when it is determined that the variable entry execution mode is on, the process from step S816 onwards is executed.

In step S816, the MPU 62 executes variable ball entry execution processing.
The variable ball entry execution process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variable ball entry execution process.
In the variable ball entry execution process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1215 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the blade member 401a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the blade member 401a is not in the open state, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1202.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the blade member 401a is being opened, it executes the processing after step S1207.

First, the processing (processing after step S1202) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the blade member 401a is not being opened in step S1201 will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 executes blade member opening execution processing. In this blade member opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the open state by executing drive control of the blade member driving section 401c.

In step S1203, a blade member open command is set. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the blade member open command set in step S1204 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the blade member 401a has been set to the open state based on the blade member open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S1204, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag or the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1204 that the high frequency support flag or special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, it sets the timer counter T to "1000" in step S1205. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 2 seconds. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the variable ball entry execution process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1204 that the high frequency support flag or the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (if it determines that the low frequency support mode of the normal mode), then step At S1206, the timer counter T is set to "50". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.1 sec. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the variable ball entry execution process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1207) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the blade member 401a is being opened in step S1201 will be described.
In step S1207, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1208.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, it executes the processing from step S1214.

First, processing (processing after step S1208) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S1208, the MPU 62 refers to the plate opening/closing execution completion flag stored in the RAM 64 to determine whether or not the plate 403a has been opened/closed. This plate opening/closing flag is a flag for specifying that the plate 403a has been opened/closed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state and before setting the blade member 401a to the closed state. The MPU 62 sets the plate opening/closing flag when opening/closing the plate 403a, and clears the plate opening/closing flag when the blade member 401a is set to the closed state.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the opening/closing of the plate 403a has been completed (when the plate opening/closing execution completion flag is set in the RAM 64), the variable ball entry execution process ends.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the opening/closing of the plate 403a has not been executed (if the plate opening/closing execution completion flag is not set in the RAM 64), the MPU 62 starts the timer counter T in step S1209. It is determined whether the value is "500" or less. In other words, in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. In the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "50" in step S1206, so in step S1209 it is determined that the value of the timer counter T is "500" or less. will do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the timer counter T is not "500" or less (in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, if 1 sec has not elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state, If determined), the variable ball entry execution process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the timer counter T is "500" or less (in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, 1 second after setting the blade member 401a to the open state). is determined to have passed), a plate opening process is executed in step S1210. In this plate opening process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate driving section 403c.

In step S1211, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "400" or less. In other words, in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 0.2 sec has elapsed after setting the plate 403a to the open state. In the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "50" in step S1206, so in step S1211 it is determined that the value of the timer counter T is "400" or less. will do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1211 that the value of the timer counter T is not "400" or less (in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, 0.2 sec has not elapsed since the plate 403a was set to the open state). If it is determined that ), the variable ball entry execution process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1211 that the value of the timer counter T is "400" or less (in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, after setting the plate 403a to the open state, 0.00). If it is determined that 2 sec has elapsed), plate closing processing is executed in step S1212. In this plate closing process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate driving section 403c.

In step S1213, the MPU 62 sets the plate opening/closing execution completion flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the plate opening/closing execution completion flag provided in the various flag storage area 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the variable ball entry execution process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1214) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S1214, the MPU 62 executes blade member closing execution processing. In this blade member closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the closed state by executing drive control of the blade member driving section 401c.

In step S1215, the MPU 62 assigns 0 to the area indicating the plate opening/closing executed flag and the variable entry execution mode flag provided in the various flag storage area 64d of the RAM 64, so that the plate opening/closing executed flag and the variable entry Clear the sphere running mode flag. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the variable ball entry execution process.

Thus, in the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the open state, enables the game ball to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, and sets the plate 403a to the open or closed state. A game ball can enter either the right ball entrance 404 or the left ball entrance 405.

In addition, in the variable ball entry execution mode in the high-frequency support mode or special mode, the time (open period) from when the plate 403a is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again is the time when the blade member 401a is set to the open state. After that, it is shorter than the time (open period) until it is set to the closed state again. Specifically, the open period of the plate 403a (0.2 sec in this embodiment) is about 1/10 of the open period of the blade member 401a (2 sec in this embodiment). In other words, the game ball entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 enters the right ball entry hole 404 with a probability of about 1/10.

In the present embodiment, the plate 403a performs one opening/closing operation during the opening period of the blade member 401a, but may perform the opening/closing operation multiple times.
Further, in the present embodiment, the open period of the plate 403a is set to 0.2 sec and the open period of the blade member 401a is set to 2 sec, but other open periods may be adopted.
Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the open state when it is determined that 1 second has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. Timing other than this may be adopted as the timing to perform.

On the other hand, in the variable ball entry execution mode in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, the time (open period) from setting the blade member 401a to the open state to setting it to the closed state again is 0.2 sec. Therefore, the plate 403a opens and closes immediately after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. In other words, the game ball cannot enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 .

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S817 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the variable ball entry execution process of step S816, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 50g corresponding to the right ball entrance 404 detects the winning of the game ball in step S817. It is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (V prize) in the ball mouth 404.例文帳に追加

When the MPU 62 determines in step S817 that the game ball has entered the right ball entrance 404, in step S818, it executes V winning success processing. In this V winning success process, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the closed state by executing the drive control of the blade member driving section 401c, and then sets the plate opening/closing execution completion flag and the variable entry execution flag stored in the RAM 64. Clear the in-mode flag. Also, in the V winning success process, the MPU 62 sets a V winning success command. The MPU 62 transmits the V winning success command set in step S818 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S807 described above.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the game ball has entered the right ball entrance 404 based on the V winning success command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817 that the game ball has not won in the right ball entrance 404, in step S819 it determines whether or not the blade member 401a is set to the closed state. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the blade member 401a is not set to the closed state in step S819, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the blade member 401a has been set to the closed state in step S819, it executes V winning failure processing in step S820. In this V winning failure process, the MPU 62 sets a V winning failure command. The MPU 62 transmits the V winning failure command set in step S820 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the game ball did not win in the right ball entrance 404 based on the V winning failure command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode as it is when "big hit" is won in the lottery, whereas when "small win" is won in the lottery, the variable When the ball is entered into the right ball entrance 404 in the variable ball entry execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.
In the variable ball execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 is operated when only a ball is entered into the left ball entrance 405, or when a ball is entered into both the right ball entrance 404 and the left ball entrance 405. If not, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered.

Here, as described above, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of the game ball winning the upper working opening 36 is higher than that of the lower working opening 37 . Further, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 36, the probability of winning a small win is 1/6.
However, in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, as described above, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, when it becomes "small winning", the game ball is placed on the right side A ball cannot be entered into the variable ball entry mechanism 40. - 特許庁
In addition, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, when it becomes "small winning", the game ball is the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 Since it is possible to enter a ball, the probability of shifting to the variable ball entry execution mode when winning a prize in the upper operation port 36 and winning a big win is about 1/60.

<Variation end processing>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation end processing.
In the fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1309 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 stores information (main display unit 45, the information relating to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during variable display (variation end execution processing).

In step S1302, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1306.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step S1303, the game number counter set in step S1104 of the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode Subtract 1 from the RTC value and update. Here, the variation command set in step S716 described above includes the value of the number-of-games counter RTC.
In step S1304, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number-of-games counter RTC is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1306.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that the number-of-games counter RTC is "0" or less, it clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1305. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

In this way, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 as a result of a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. After completion, transition to high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed.

After executing the process of step S1305, if it is determined in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, or if it is determined in step S1304 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 , In step S1306, it is determined whether or not the game mode is a special mode.
When the MPU 62 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S1306 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), it ends the fluctuation end processing without executing the processing after step S1307. .
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the game mode is the special mode at step S1306, at step S1307, the number of game counter RTC set at step S1108 of the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode Subtract 1 from the value and update. Here, the variation command set in step S716 described above includes the value of the number-of-games counter RTC.

In step S1308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number-of-games counter RTC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the fluctuation end processing without executing the processing after step S1309.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the number-of-games counter RTC is "0" or less, it clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1309. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation end processing.

In this way, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 as a result of a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the end of the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. After that, go to a special mode. The special mode continues until 30 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 functions as game state transition means for transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode.

In the present embodiment, in the normal mode and the high-frequency support mode of the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60, based on the internal lottery result (low-frequency support mode result or high-frequency support mode result), The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.
In addition, in this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but may have this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches to an opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The game state is shifted from the normal control state, and when the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode. can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is launched toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the entered game ball to be entered. Then, the main controller 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 . Here, the probability (approximately 1/12.5) of shifting to the open/close execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 is , based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode is higher than (approximately 1/60). there is According to this, since the player expects the game state to shift to the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Switch game mode. Specifically, when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode, the normal mode Shift the game mode to. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, so the pachinko machine 10 can You can improve the attention to.
In this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode, Although the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 changes the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times (30 times in the present embodiment) are completed after the game mode is shifted to the special mode. Transition. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game is completed, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game rounds is completed. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. As a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when the number of times of "small winning" exceeds a predetermined number of times, the game mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. You may make it move.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game ball is shot toward the right-handed route. In other words, the main controller 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when a game ball is shot toward the right-handed route during stay in the special mode. According to this, the player shoots the game ball toward the right-handed route in the high-frequency support mode, and shoots the game ball toward the left-handed route in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play comfortably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the game state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is a high-frequency support mode. It functions as a second lottery result that shifts the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result is the low-frequency support mode, increasing the chances of shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
Then, the low frequency support mode is a normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained. It has a special mode to transition to. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.
In this embodiment, in the special mode, the probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 100%, which is higher than in the normal mode, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, the main controller 60 shifts from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is shifted and the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In this embodiment, the main control device 60, when the game state is shifted from the opening and closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing, for example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the completion of the game round.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 23, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. An input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23 , 53 to 55 , speaker unit 24 and display control device 100 .
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 53 to 55 and the speaker unit 24 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which, in addition to the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 105 . Specifically, MPU 102 controls VDP 105 by generating commands for VDP 105 .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile RAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 51 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 51 . The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 51 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 51 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2001 to S2005 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62 , it stores the command in the RAM 94 . Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62 , and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62 . The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines effects for the game round, effects for the variable entering execution mode, effects for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 53 to 55 and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S<b>2004 , the MPU 92 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the demonstration command received from the MPU 62 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 53 to 55 and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S2005, command transmission processing for transmitting commands set in the effect determination processing in step S2002 and the demonstration display execution processing in step S2004 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100 , and transmits various commands to the display control device 100 . , the command is transmitted to the display control device 100 .
After that, the MPU 92 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process for executing an effect for the game round, an effect for the variable entering execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2109 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has been received, in step S2102, based on the content of the type command, whether or not the win/loss result is "big win". judge.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the winning result is "big hit", the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2103.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the win/loss result is not "big hit winning", it executes the processing from step S2104.

First, in step S2102, the processing (processing after step S2103) when the MPU 92 determines that the winning result is "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S2103, the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process for big wins. In this jackpot symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number on the activated line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined, and it is determined that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result", the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. , the information relating to the combination of symbols having the number of . The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Next, the processing (processing after step S2104) when the MPU 92 determines that the winning result is not "big hit winning" at step S2102 will be described.
In step S2104, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the winning result is "small winning" based on the content of the type command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the win/loss result is "small hit winning", in step S2105, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for a small win. In this small winning symbol determination process, when "small winning" is obtained in the winning lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the MPU 92 finally stops on the activated line L. Information relating to a special combination of symbols is determined as the stop result to be displayed. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3-4-1"). In the case of winning a "small hit" in the lottery performed based on the prize winning to the lower operation port 37, the MPU 92 has the same alphabet as the stop result that is finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Determine information relating to the combination of symbols.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the success/failure result is not a "small win" (if it determines that the success/failure result is a "normal deviation result"), in step S2106, the normal deviation Execute the symbol determination process for. In the pattern determination process for the normal deviation, the MPU 92 determines which of the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 has won a prize as a trigger to execute the variable display of the pattern based on the contents of the command for variation. (Which of the first result display portion 45a and the second result display portion 45b, the main display portion 45 to execute the variable display) is determined, and the ready-to-win display is generated based on the content of the variable command. determine whether or not to

The MPU 92 determines that the variable display of the pattern is to be executed with the winning of the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and when it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs, the final stop display on the effective line L is the ready-to-win. Determines information relating to the combination of symbols to be displayed. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally displayed stop on the activated line L. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

In addition, the MPU 92 determines that the variation display of the pattern is to be executed by triggering the winning of the lower opening 37, and when it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs, the stop result is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. , the information relating to the combination of symbols for reach display is determined.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally displayed stop on the activated line L. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines a combination of symbols that is different from both the combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display.

After executing the process of step S2103, step S2105, or step S2106, the MPU 92 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Here, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 92, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when it becomes "small winning", Before the variable display of the pattern display device 51 ends, the character is displayed on the display screen G, and a pre-notification performance is executed to notify the player to hit right with the words of the character. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes the advance notification effect five seconds before the end of the variable display of the symbol display device 51 . According to this, the player starts hitting to the right after confirming the advance notification effect, so that the game ball reaches the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 before the blade member 401a is set to the open state by the MPU 62. can be done. In other words, the game ball can reach the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 within 5 seconds after being shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 .

In this way, in the present embodiment, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when it becomes a "small winning" 2, the player can enter the game ball into the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 by starting right hitting after confirming the advance notification effect.
Here, as described above, in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the upper operation opening 36 than the lower operation opening 37, and in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball enters the upper operation opening 36 The probability of winning the lower operation opening 37 is higher than that. Then, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37, the probability (approximately 1/12.5) of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode is It is higher than the probability (about 1/60) of shifting to the open/close execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode functions as a first time-saving state in which the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is likely to enter the ball. The low-frequency support mode of the special mode functions as a second time-saving state in which the ball is less likely to enter the right variable ball-entering mechanism 40 compared to the high-frequency support mode. According to this, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, so that the pachinko machine can be diversified. 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, the MPU 92, as a result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning in the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when it becomes "small winning" is designed not to execute the advance notification effect.

In this way, in the present embodiment, in the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when it becomes "small winning" 2, since the player cannot confirm the advance notification effect, the game ball cannot be entered into the right variable ball entry mechanism 40.例文帳に追加In other words, in the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, the ball cannot be entered into the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 .

Also, in this embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the lower operation opening 37 than the upper operation opening 36, so in the high frequency support mode, the game ball toward the right-handed route By firing , it functions as a first time-saving state in which the situation is advantageous to the player. In the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the upper working port 36 than the lower working port 37, so the low-frequency support mode of the special mode allows the game ball to hit the right-handed route. By firing, it functions as a second time-saving state that puts the player in a disadvantageous situation compared to the high-frequency support mode. In other words, the low-frequency support mode of the special mode becomes an advantageous situation for the player by shooting the game ball toward the left-handed route. According to this, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, thereby diversifying the types of game states. 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first time saving state increases the probability of winning the lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36, and the second time saving state is the upper working port 36 than the lower working port 37 By increasing the probability of winning a prize, an advantageous situation and a disadvantageous situation are created for the player.
On the other hand, the first time saving state shortens the display duration of the variable display based on the winning to the lower working port 37, and the second time saving state is the fluctuation based on the winning to the lower working port 37 Advantages and disadvantages for the player may be created by lengthening the display duration of the display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

At step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined at step S2103, step S2105, or step S2106, and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected at step S2107. Then, the MPU 92 stores the stop result command and the pattern command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. These stop result command and pattern command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the game cycle on the symbol display device 51 based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the game round based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L. stop display.

After executing the processing of step S2108, or when determining in step S2101 that the command for variation and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S2109 onward.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a command for the variable ball entry execution mode (blade member open command, V winning success command, or V winning failure command) transmitted from the MPU 62 is received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the command for the variable entry execution mode has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2112.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the command for the variable entry execution mode has been received, in step S2110 the MPU 92 executes processing for determining the effect for the variable entry execution mode. In this variable entrance execution mode effect determination process, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the blade member open command has been received, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, A performance pattern corresponding to the opening of the blade member 401a is selected. Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the V winning success command has been received, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the success of the V winning by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93. If it is determined in step S2109 that the V winning failure command has been received, the rendering table pre-stored in the ROM 93 is referenced to select a rendering pattern corresponding to the V winning failure.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 sets a command for the variable entry execution mode including the effect for the variable entry execution mode selected in step S2110. Then, the MPU 92 stores commands for the variable entry execution mode in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. This command for the variable entry execution mode is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100, based on the command for the variable ball entry execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92, produces an effect for the variable ball entry execution mode (opening of the blade member 401a, success of V winning, or failure of V winning). ) is read out from the program ROM 103 for executing the effect corresponding to the symbol display device 51 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. Thereby, the symbol display device 51 executes the performance for the variable ball-entering execution mode, and informs the player that the blade member 401a has been released, that the V winning is successful, or that the V winning is unsuccessful.

After executing the process of step S2111, or when determining in step S2109 that the command for the variable entry execution mode has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2112 and subsequent steps.
In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2116.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, in step S2113 it determines the sort result type based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2114, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the sort result type determined in step S2113.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in order to determine the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204 as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the "high frequency support mode result".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202, it selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), In step S2203, based on the contents of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode is the special mode when "big hit" is won in the lottery.

When the game mode is determined to be the special mode in step S2203, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2202 and selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204, the opening and closing execution mode effect is produced. Choose B. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time required to open and close the big winning opening 38a 15 times in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effect A and the effect B.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2114. This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 51 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 51 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the process of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62 . After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 27, has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has distribution results of "high-frequency support mode results" and "low-frequency support mode results" as game results other than the "non-normal result".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, contents such as the game state differ according to the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times. In addition, in the "high-frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. . In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, in the "high-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B. . In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. Furthermore, in the "low-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the "special mode".

On the other hand, in the "special mode" game mode, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the game result based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Therefore, the player recognizes that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" or the "low-frequency support mode result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Regarding the entry of the game ball into the right variable entry mechanism and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an effect for a game round when a game ball enters the lower operation opening triggered by winning the through gate in the high-frequency support mode.
In addition, the high-frequency support mode is a "jackpot winning" or "small winning" in the lottery, and if it is distributed to the "high-frequency support mode result" in the distribution lottery, or during the stay in the special mode When the lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution lottery results in a "low-frequency support mode result". Also, FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the winning result is "small winning".

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4B) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. , it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols. In addition, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the reference number of times for ending the high-frequency support mode (55 times in FIG. 28A), and displays the value on the symbol display device 51 based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops displaying part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4(B)) as shown in FIG. 28(A). In this state, the same combination of symbols (“A” in this embodiment) is displayed to suggest a stop result, and in this state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to display a ready-to-win display. Generate and move to reach period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. By stopping display on L, the result of the lottery is announced.

After the MPU 102 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same alphabet on the activated line L, the MPU 62 controls the blade member driving section 401c as shown in FIG. The blade member 401a is set to the open state.
Further, the MPU 102 generates an effect for notifying the player of the opening of the blade member based on the blade member opening command received from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and informs the player to hit right by the character's words.

28D and 28E, the MPU 102 executes effects for the variable entry execution mode based on the command for the variable entry execution mode received from the MPU 92 .
In the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 receives a V prize success command from the MPU 92 when the game ball enters the right ball entrance 404 (V prize) in the variable ball entry execution mode. As shown in FIG. 28(D), an effect corresponding to a successful V prize is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the character "V" on the entire surface of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and notifies the player that the game ball has won the right ball entrance 404 (V win). .
In addition, in the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, when the game ball does not enter the right ball entrance 404 (V prize), the MPU 102, based on the V prize failure command received from the MPU 92, performs FIG. As shown in E), an effect corresponding to the failure of winning the V prize is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the characters "Unfortunately" on the entire surface of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and informs the player that the game ball did not enter the right ball entrance 404 (V win). inform.

FIG. 29 is an enlarged view showing the periphery of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
After causing the MPU 102 to stop display the combination of symbols having the same alphabet on the effective line L, the MPU 62 drives and controls the blade member driving section 401c as shown in FIGS. 28(C) and 29(A). , the blade member 401a is set to the open state (see the arrow in the drawing).

When 1 second has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state, the MPU 62 controls the plate driving section 403c to open the plate 403a as shown in FIG. After setting (see the arrow in the figure) and a predetermined time (0.2 sec in this embodiment) has passed, the plate 403a is set to the closed state (see the arrow in FIG. 29C).
Then, when the game ball enters the right ball entrance 404 (V win), or when 2 seconds have passed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state, the MPU 62 performs the following operations as shown in FIG. 29(C). , the blade member driving section 401c is controlled to set the blade member 401a to the closed state (see the arrow in the figure).

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball wins (V wins) in the right ball entrance.
MPU 102 responds to successful V winning as shown in FIGS. Execute the production to do. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, or determines that the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 30(B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 30(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 30(C)) up to the end reference number of times of the high-frequency support mode based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204, the effect B is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this production B, as shown in FIG. 30(D), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "You're in a 30-turn chance zone." !” informs the player that the game result is the “low-frequency support mode result” (transition to the special mode).

Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 30(E). In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (30 times in FIG. 30(E)) up to the end reference number of times of the special mode based on the content of the variation command, and displays the pattern display device 51. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In this embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an effect for a game cycle when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols. Further, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (15 times in FIG. 31(A)) up to the standard number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the variable command. displayed in the upper left corner of the Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby allowing combinations of the same symbols ( In this embodiment, "2") is displayed to indicate the stop result, and in that state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate the ready-to-win display and shift to the ready-to-win period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. By stopping display on L, the result of the lottery is announced. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, or determines that the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 31(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 31(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 completes 30 game rounds without "winning a jackpot" in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 31(D), it shifts to the normal mode.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby achieving the same combination of symbols. In this state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate a ready-to-win display and shift to a ready-to-win period.

After that, the MPU 102 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying a combination of symbols having the same number on the activated line L as the stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 . After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high-frequency support mode result", in step S2202, the MPU 92 selects effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 31(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 31(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204, the effect B is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect B, as shown in FIG. 31(E), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "You're in a 30-turn chance zone." !” informs the player that the game result is the “low-frequency support mode result” (transition to the special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (30 times in FIG. 31(E)) up to the reference number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the command for variation. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In this embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) In the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode based on the result of the internal lottery, In the special mode of the low-frequency support mode, the game state shifts to the high-frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. You play with the expectation that you will stay. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(2) When the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the main controller 60 shifts the game state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. When moving to the frequency support mode, attention is paid to whether or not the player is staying in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(3) Low-frequency support mode has a higher probability of hitting the upper working hole 37 than lower working hole 37, and high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of hitting the lower working hole 37 than the upper working hole 36. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the upper working port 36 in the low frequency support mode, and shoots the game ball aiming at the lower working port 37 in the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can clearly suggest the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode to the player.

(4) Based on the result of the internal lottery performed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37, the probability of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is determined when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36. Based on the result of the internal lottery, the probability of shifting to the open/close execution mode is higher than that of the player, so the player expects to shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(5) The main controller 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(6) After shifting the game mode to the special mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds have been completed. Pay attention to the number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(7) The results of the internal lottery are the low-frequency support mode result that shifts the game state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result that shifts the game state to the high-frequency support mode. , the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result is the low-frequency support mode, and provides an opportunity to shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode. can be increased. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(8) The low frequency support mode is a normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained. , the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(9) The low frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode, and the main controller 60 changes the game state to the low frequency support mode. When the game mode is shifted, the game mode is shifted to the special mode, and when the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, so that the player can shift the game state to the low-frequency support mode. Even if it does, the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(10) The game state is a high frequency support mode in which the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is easy to enter, and a special mode in which the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is difficult to enter compared to the high frequency support mode. Since the support mode is provided, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(11) The game state includes a high-frequency support mode in which the player is in an advantageous situation by shooting game balls toward the right-handed route, and a high-frequency support mode by shooting game balls toward the right-handed route Since it has a low frequency support mode of a special mode which is a disadvantageous situation for the player compared to the frequency support mode, when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, the normal control state is changed to the opening and closing execution mode. It is possible to diversify the types of game states that can be shifted to the game state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 as a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. ), it transitioned to a special mode. Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the allocation result is not the "high-frequency support mode result" in step S1101 and then determines that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (game mode is the normal mode), a special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1107. In other words, in the first embodiment, the MPU 62 always transitions to the special mode when transitioning to the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 shifts to the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 62 executes a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the special mode, and wins the lottery. , it differs from the first embodiment in that it shifts to a special mode.

In this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1113A as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), The process after step S1105 is executed.
First, processing (processing after step S1102) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" will be described.

At step S1102, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in RAM 64 is cleared.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes with different support modes to be shifted to after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal mode in which the support mode is set after the end of the opening and closing execution mode according to the distribution result of the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result", and the "low frequency support Mode Result” and “High Frequency Support Mode Result” have a special mode as a game mode in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution result.

The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which game mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, the game mode is set to the normal mode.

At step S1104, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "100". After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, processing (processing after step S1105) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high-frequency support mode result" will be described.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), in step S1105, It is determined whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (when it determines that the game mode is the special mode), it executes the processing after step S1102 described above. In other words, when the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 switches the support mode to high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, regardless of the result of distributing the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result." Set to support mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S1106, it is stored in the RAM 64. clear the high-frequency support flag. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

In step S1109A, the MPU 62 executes special mode lottery processing. Specifically, in the special mode lottery process, the MPU 62 performs a lottery with a predetermined probability (1/8 in this embodiment) to determine whether or not to shift to the special mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the probability of shifting to the special mode to 1/8, but it may be larger than 1/8 or smaller than 1/8. In addition, for example, when the number of games played until the "big win" is achieved in the lottery lottery is smaller than a predetermined number of times, the MPU 62 reduces the probability of shifting to the special mode, and If the number of times the game is played until winning is greater than a predetermined number of times, the probability of shifting to the special mode may be increased, and the probability of shifting to the special mode may be increased according to other game conditions. You can change it.

In step S1110A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the lottery for the special mode has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has been won, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1107.

At step S1107, the MPU 62 sets a special mode flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the special mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.
At step S1108, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "30".
At step S1111A, the MPU 62 sets a special mode command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends. This special mode command includes information for making the sound emission control device 90 recognize that the game mode is set to the special mode. The MPU 62 transmits the special mode command set in step S1111A to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the special mode based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until 30 games, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when 30 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In addition, after executing the process of step S1108, the MPU 62 clears the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37 .

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery was not won, it executes the processing from step S1112A.
At step S1112A, the MPU 62 clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In step S1113A, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "0". After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In this way, when a win occurs in the winning lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "high frequency support mode result", the game state is the open/close execution mode regardless of the current game state. After completion, transition to high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without winning in the winning lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

Also, if a hit occurs in the winning lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is "low frequency support mode result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode if the game mode is a special mode. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode, and if the game mode is the normal mode, it shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without winning in the winning lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low-frequency support mode continues at least until a win occurs in the winning lottery. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode is a special mode with a probability of 1/8 and a normal mode with a probability of 7/8. When the game mode becomes the special mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, when no win occurs in the lottery, that is, when the result of the lottery is "normal result", the game state does not shift.

Here, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is included in the variation command described above. In addition, information relating to the game mode (information relating to whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the aforementioned opening command.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 functions as game state transition means for transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode.

In the present embodiment, in the normal mode and the high-frequency support mode of the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60, based on the internal lottery result (low-frequency support mode result or high-frequency support mode result), The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In addition, in this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but may have this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches to an opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The game state is shifted from the normal control state, and when the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode. can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 shoots toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the entered game ball to be entered. Then, the main controller 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 . Here, the probability (approximately 1/12.5) of shifting to the open/close execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 is , based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode is higher than (approximately 1/60). there is According to this, since the player expects the game state to shift to the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Switch game mode. Specifically, when shifting the game state to the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode or the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode , Shift the game mode to the normal mode. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, so the pachinko machine 10 can You can improve the attention to.
In this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode or the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode. , the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, but based on conditions other than this, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 changes the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times (30 times in the present embodiment) are completed after the game mode is shifted to the special mode. Transition. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game is completed, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game rounds is completed. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. As a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when the number of times of "small winning" exceeds a predetermined number of times, the game mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. You may make it move.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game ball is shot toward the right-handed route. In other words, the main controller 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when a game ball is shot toward the right-handed route during stay in the special mode. According to this, the player shoots the game ball toward the right-handed route in the high-frequency support mode, and shoots the game ball toward the left-handed route in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play comfortably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the game state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is a high-frequency support mode. It functions as a second lottery result that shifts the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result is the low-frequency support mode, increasing the chances of shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
Then, the low frequency support mode is a normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained. It has a special mode to transition to. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode. Specifically, in this embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.
In this embodiment, in the special mode, the probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode is 100%, which is higher than in the normal mode, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, the main controller 60 shifts from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is shifted and the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In this embodiment, the main control device 60, when the game state is shifted from the opening and closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing, for example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the completion of the game round.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode functions as special mode lottery means for executing a special mode lottery to determine whether to transition the game mode to the special mode. Then, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. According to this, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. will focus on the results of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
In the present embodiment, the special mode lottery is executed in the special mode lottery process of step S1109A in the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A special mode lottery may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process for executing an effect for the game round, an effect for the variable entering execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes after step S2112.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2117A.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, in step S2113 it determines the sort result type based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2114A, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the sort result type determined in step S2113.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in order to determine the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204A as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the "high frequency support mode result".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202, it selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), In step S2203, based on the contents of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode is the special mode when "big hit" is won in the lottery.

When the game mode is determined to be the special mode in step S2203, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2202 and selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, the opening and closing execution mode effect is produced. Select B1. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
It should be noted that the duration of the effect A and the effect B1 corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effect A and the effect B1.

Here, the effect B1 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 causes a character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's line "You're in a 30-turn chance zone." !” informs the player that the game result is the “low-frequency support mode result” (shift to the special mode) (see FIGS. 30(D) and 31(E)).
On the other hand, in the effect B1 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the lines of the character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the special mode is displayed to the player. It is different from the production B of the first embodiment in that it does not notify that the transition to .

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2114A. This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 51 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 51 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the processing of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S2117A onward.

In step S2117A, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a special mode command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117A that the special mode command has been received, in step S2118A the MPU 92 executes special mode notification processing based on the contents of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for notifying the player of the transition to the special mode based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player that the special mode will be entered. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Notify the transition to the mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2117A that the special mode command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62 . After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 35, has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has distribution results of "high-frequency support mode results" and "low-frequency support mode results" as game results excluding "normal outlier results".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, contents such as the game state differ according to the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times. In addition, in the "high-frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. . In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, in the "high-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the "low-frequency support mode result" based on winning the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B1. . In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B1. Furthermore, in the "low-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the "special mode" with a probability of 1/8 and the "normal mode" with a probability of 7/8.

On the other hand, in the "special mode" game mode, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times. In addition, in the game result based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Therefore, the player recognizes that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" or the "low-frequency support mode result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Regarding the flow after the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball wins (V wins) in the right ball entrance.
MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to a successful V winning as shown in FIG.
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, or determines that the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 36(B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 36(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 36(C)) to the end reference number of times of the high-frequency support mode based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, the effect B1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has been won, it sets a special mode command in step S1111A. If so, in step S2118A, special mode notification processing is executed based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, as shown in FIG. 36(D). The player is notified of the transition to the special mode with "It's a chance zone for 30 spins!".

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery was not won, the MPU 102 does not set the special mode command. The character and the lines of this character are not displayed on the screen G, and the player is not notified of the transition to the special mode (not shown).
In this embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the lines of the character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and notifies the player that the mode will shift to the special mode. By not doing so, it was notified that the lottery for the special mode was not won. On the other hand, the MPU 102 displays the character and the lines of the character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and camouflages the player as if he or she won the special mode lottery. good too. According to this, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction as to whether or not the special mode lottery will be won.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 36(E). In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode is a special mode with a probability of 1/8 and a normal mode with a probability of 7/8. When the game mode becomes the special mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (30 times in FIG. 36(E)) up to the standard number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the command for variation. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an effect for a game cycle when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols. Further, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (15 times in FIG. 37A) up to the standard number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the command for variation. displayed in the upper left corner of the Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In this embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby allowing combinations of the same symbols ( In this embodiment, "2") is displayed to indicate the stop result, and in that state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate the ready-to-win display and shift to the ready-to-win period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. By stopping display on L, the result of the lottery is announced. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, or determines that the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 37(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 37(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

Further, when the pachinko machine 10 completes 30 game rounds without "winning a jackpot" in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 37(D), it shifts to the normal mode.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby achieving the same combination of symbols. In this state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate a ready-to-win display and shift to a ready-to-win period.

After that, the MPU 102 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying a combination of symbols having the same number on the activated line L as the stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 . After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high-frequency support mode result", in step S2202, the MPU 92 selects effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 37(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 37(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, the effect B1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has been won, it sets a special mode command in step S1111A. If so, in step S2118A, special mode notification processing is executed based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command sent from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 after the opening/closing execution mode is completed, and the character's line "It's a 30-turn chance zone!" to notify the player of the shift to the special mode (see FIG. 36(D)). Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the lottery for the special mode has not been won, the MPU 102 does not set the special mode command. At the end of the mode, the character and the lines of the character are not displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and the player is not notified of the transition to the special mode.
In this embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the lines of the character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and notifies the player that the mode will shift to the special mode. By not doing so, it was notified that the lottery for the special mode was not won. On the other hand, the MPU 102 displays the character and the lines of the character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and camouflages the player as if he or she won the special mode lottery. good too. According to this, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction as to whether or not the special mode lottery will be won.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode is a special mode with a probability of 1/8 and a normal mode with a probability of 7/8. When the game mode becomes the special mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the special mode, based on the content of the variation command. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In this embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to this embodiment, the same functions and effects as (1) to (4), (5) to (8), (10), and (11) in the first embodiment can be obtained. In addition, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(12) The main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Attention will be paid to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 as a "big hit" in the winning lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. ), it transitioned to a special mode. When the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, this special mode continues until 30 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after shifting to the special mode, the MPU 62 executes a lottery as to whether or not to continue the special mode each time a game cycle is completed. differs from the first embodiment in that it shifts to the normal mode.

In this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, transition processing and variation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are different from those in the first embodiment. The contents of transition processing and variation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1107 as shown in FIG. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 62 terminates the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends without executing the process of step S1108 after executing the process of step S1107.

<Variation end processing>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation end processing.
In the fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1310B as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 executes the processes from step S1306 onward after executing the processes of steps S1301 to S1305 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

After executing the process of step S1305, if it is determined in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, or if it is determined in step S1304 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 , In step S1306, it is determined whether or not the game mode is a special mode.
When the MPU 62 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S1306 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), it ends the fluctuation end processing without executing the processing after step S1307B. .
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the game mode is the special mode at step S1306, at step S1307B, the special mode continuation lottery process is executed. Specifically, in the special mode continuation lottery process, the MPU 62 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to continue the special mode with a predetermined probability (29/30 in the present embodiment) after the end of the game cycle.

In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the probability of continuing the special mode to 29/30 (the probability of shifting to the normal mode to 1/30), but it may be greater than 29/30 or less than 29/30. may In addition, for example, when the number of games played until the "big win" is achieved in the lottery lottery is smaller than a predetermined number of times, the MPU 62 reduces the probability of continuing the special mode and If the number of times the game is played until the game is won is greater than a predetermined number of times, the probability of continuing the special mode may be increased, and the probability of continuing the special mode may be increased according to other game conditions. You can change it.

In step S1308B, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the continuation lottery for the special mode has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the continuation lottery for the special mode has been won, it ends the fluctuation end processing without executing the processing after step S1309.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the special mode continuation lottery has not been won, in step S1309 the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In step S1310B, MPU 62 sets a normal mode command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation end processing. This normal mode command includes information for making the sound emission control device 90 recognize that the game mode is set to the normal mode. MPU 62 transmits the normal mode command set in step S1310B to sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the normal mode based on the normal mode command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

In this way, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 as a result of a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the end of the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. After that, go to a special mode. The special mode is continued if winning the continuation lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 functions as game state transition means for transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode.

In the present embodiment, in the normal mode and the high-frequency support mode of the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60, based on the internal lottery result (low-frequency support mode result or high-frequency support mode result), The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In addition, in this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but may have this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches to an opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The game state is shifted from the normal control state, and when the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode. can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 shoots toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the entered game ball to be entered. Then, the main controller 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 . Here, the probability (approximately 1/12.5) of shifting to the open/close execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 is , based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode is higher than (approximately 1/60). there is According to this, since the player expects the game state to shift to the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Switch game mode. Specifically, when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode, the normal mode Shift the game mode to. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, so the pachinko machine 10 can You can improve the attention to.
In this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode, Although the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fluctuation ending process is a normal mode lottery means for executing a normal mode lottery to determine whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the main controller 60. function as Then, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when winning the normal mode lottery. According to this, when the main controller 60 wins the normal mode lottery, the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main controller 60, after shifting the game mode to the special mode, when the normal mode lottery with the probability of continuing the special mode set to 29/30 is not won, from the special mode to the normal Although the game mode is shifted to the mode, for example, the probability of continuing the special mode may be set by dividing it into a plurality of probabilities such as 29/30 and 28/30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the game state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is a high-frequency support mode. It functions as a second lottery result that shifts the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result is the low-frequency support mode, increasing the chances of shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
Then, the low frequency support mode is a normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained. It has a special mode to transition to. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode. Specifically, in this embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In this embodiment, in the special mode, the probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode is 100%, which is higher than in the normal mode, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, the main controller 60 shifts from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is shifted and the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In this embodiment, the main control device 60, when the game state is shifted from the opening and closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing, for example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the completion of the game round.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process for executing an effect for the game round, an effect for the variable entering execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes after step S2112.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2119B.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, in step S2113 it determines the sort result type based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2114B, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the sort result type determined in step S2113.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in order to determine the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204B as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the "high frequency support mode result".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202, it selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), In step S2203, based on the contents of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode is the special mode when "big hit" is won in the lottery.

When the game mode is determined to be the special mode in step S2203, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2202 and selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, the opening and closing execution mode effect is produced. Select B2. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effect A and the effect B2 corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effect A and the effect B2.

Here, the effect B2 of this embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 causes a character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's line "You're in a 30-turn chance zone." !” informs the player that the game result is the “low-frequency support mode result” (shift to the special mode) (see FIGS. 30(D) and 31(E)).
On the other hand, in the effect B2 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "Enter the chance zone!" This is different from the effect B of the first embodiment in that the player is notified that the game result is the "low frequency support mode result" (shift to the special mode).

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2114B. This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 51 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 51 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the processing of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2119B and subsequent steps.

In step S2119B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a normal mode command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2119B that the normal mode command has been received, in step S2120B it executes normal mode notification processing based on the contents of the normal mode command. In this normal mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a normal mode notification command. This normal mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

Based on the normal mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for notifying the player of the shift to the normal mode. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player that the mode will be changed to the normal mode. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and informs the player that the game will shift to the normal mode with the character's line "chance zone finished".

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2119B that the normal mode command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62 . After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 42, has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has distribution results of "high-frequency support mode results" and "low-frequency support mode results" as game results excluding "normal outlier results".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, contents such as the game state differ according to the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times. In addition, in the "high-frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. . In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, in the "high-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B2. . In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B2. Furthermore, in the "low-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the "special mode".

On the other hand, in the "special mode" game mode, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the game result based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Therefore, the player recognizes that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" or the "low-frequency support mode result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Regarding the flow after the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism>
FIG. 43 shows an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball wins (V wins) in the right ball entrance.
MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to a successful V winning as shown in FIG.
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high-frequency support mode result", in step S2202, the MPU 92 selects effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 43(B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 43(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 43(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, the effect B2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect B2, as shown in FIG. 43(D), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and also displays the character's line "Enter the chance zone!" , the player is notified that the game result is the "low frequency support mode result" (transition to the special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 43(E). In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode continues the special mode if winning the continuation lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B, and shifts to the normal mode if not winning.
Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an effect for a game cycle when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby allowing combinations of the same symbols ( In this embodiment, "2") is displayed to indicate the stop result, and in that state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate the ready-to-win display and shift to the ready-to-win period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. By stopping display on L, the result of the lottery is announced. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, or determines that the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 44(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 44(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode if the continuation lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B is not won.
Here, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the continuation lottery for the special mode has not been won, in step S1310B the normal mode command is set, and in step S2119B the MPU 92 receives the normal mode command. If so, in step S2120B, normal mode notification processing is executed based on the content of the normal mode command. In this normal mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a normal mode notification command. This normal mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

Based on the normal mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 as shown in FIG. to notify the player of the shift to the normal mode.
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode as shown in FIG. 44(E).

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the continuation lottery for the special mode has been won, the MPU 102 does not set the normal mode command. The dialogue of this character is not displayed, and the player is not notified of the transition to the normal mode. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby achieving the same combination of symbols. In this state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate a ready-to-win display and shift to a ready-to-win period.

After that, the MPU 102 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying a combination of symbols having the same number on the activated line L as the stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 . After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high-frequency support mode result", in step S2202, the MPU 92 selects effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 44(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 44(C)) to the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, the effect B2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect B2, as shown in FIG. 44(F), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and also displays the character's line "Enter the chance zone!" , the player is notified that the game result is the "low frequency support mode result" (transition to the special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode continues the special mode if winning the continuation lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B, and shifts to the normal mode if not winning. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same actions and effects as (1) to (5) and (7) to (11) in the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained. can play.
(13) Since the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when winning the normal mode lottery, the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 as a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. ), it transitioned to a special mode. When the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, this special mode continues until 30 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode is set to 30 or 50 games, which is the end standard number of times set in the game number counter RTC. It differs from the first embodiment in that it continues until digestion.

In this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1110C as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), The process after step S1105 is executed.
First, processing (processing after step S1102) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" will be described.

At step S1102, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in RAM 64 is cleared.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes with different support modes to be shifted to after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal mode in which the support mode is set after the end of the opening and closing execution mode according to the distribution result of the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result", and the "low frequency support Mode Result” and “High Frequency Support Mode Result” have a special mode as a game mode in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution result.

The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which game mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, the game mode is set to the normal mode.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, processing (processing after step S1105) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high-frequency support mode result" will be described.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), in step S1105, It is determined whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (when it determines that the game mode is the special mode), it executes the processing after step S1102 described above. In other words, when the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 switches the support mode to high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, regardless of the result of distributing the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result." Set to support mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S1109C, the game number counter is set. Execute the process. This game number counter setting process will be described later in detail.

At step S1106, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
At step S1107, the MPU 62 sets a special mode flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the special mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.

In step S1110C, MPU 62 sets a special mode command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends. This special mode command includes information for making the sound emission control device 90 recognize that the game mode is set to the special mode. MPU 62 transmits the special mode command set in step S1110C to sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the special mode based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the number-of-games counter setting process.
In the number-of-games counter setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1401 to S1404 as shown in FIG.
In step S<b>1401 , the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 . In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the support mode when "big winning" or "small winning" is achieved in the lottery is the high-frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1401 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, in step S1402 it determines whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is "90" or more. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery is "small hit winning" before completing 10 game rounds after shifting to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is "90" or more, it sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "50" in step S1403. ” is set. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode in step S1401 (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), or if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 When it is determined that the value of RTC is not "90" or more, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "30" in step S1404. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode is continued until 30 or 50 games, which are the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when 30 or 50 game rounds have been completed. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
Here, information about the number of times the special mode continues (30 times or 50 times) is included in the special mode command described above.
In addition, after executing the processing of step S1107, the MPU 62 clears the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37.

In this way, when a win occurs in the winning lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "high frequency support mode result", the game state is the open/close execution mode regardless of the current game state. After completion, transition to high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without winning in the winning lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

Also, if a hit occurs in the winning lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is "low frequency support mode result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode if the game mode is a special mode. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode, and if the game mode is the normal mode, it shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without winning in the winning lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low-frequency support mode continues at least until a win occurs in the winning lottery. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 or 50 game times are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, when no win occurs in the lottery, that is, when the result of the lottery is "normal result", the game state does not shift.

Here, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is included in the variation command and the special mode command described above. In addition, information relating to the game mode (information relating to whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the aforementioned opening command.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 functions as game state transition means for transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode.

In the present embodiment, in the normal mode and the high-frequency support mode of the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60, based on the internal lottery result (low-frequency support mode result or high-frequency support mode result), The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.
In addition, in this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but may have this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches to an opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The game state is shifted from the normal control state, and when the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode. can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 shoots toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the entered game ball to be entered. Then, the main controller 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 . Here, the probability (approximately 1/12.5) of shifting to the open/close execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 is , based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode is higher than (approximately 1/60). there is According to this, since the player expects the game state to shift to the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Switch game mode. Specifically, when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode, the normal mode Shift the game mode to. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, so the pachinko machine 10 can You can improve the attention to.
In this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode, Although the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the game mode is shifted to the special mode, the main control device 60 switches from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times (30 times or 50 times in this embodiment) are completed. Switch game mode. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game is completed, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 or 50 game rounds have been completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. Alternatively, the game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game rounds other than this is completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 or 50 game rounds have been completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. For example, as a result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when the number of times of "small winning" exceeds a predetermined number of times, the special mode is changed to the normal mode. You may make it transfer a game mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 or 50 game rounds have been completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. For example, the game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game ball is shot toward the right-handed route. In other words, the main controller 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when a game ball is shot toward the right-handed route during stay in the special mode. According to this, the player shoots the game ball toward the right-handed route in the high-frequency support mode, and shoots the game ball toward the left-handed route in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play comfortably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the game state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is a high-frequency support mode. It functions as a second lottery result that shifts the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result is the low-frequency support mode, increasing the chances of shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
Then, the low frequency support mode is a normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained. It has a special mode to transition to. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode. Specifically, in this embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In this embodiment, in the special mode, the probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode is 100%, which is higher than in the normal mode, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, the main controller 60 shifts from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is shifted and the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In this embodiment, the main control device 60, when the game state is shifted from the opening and closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing, for example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the completion of the game round.

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 controls the number of times the game rounds are completed and the end reference number of times (this embodiment 100 times), based on the result of comparison with a threshold value set to a smaller number of times (90 times in this embodiment), a special mode of 50 times that is advantageous to the player (advantage side game situation) and an advantageous side They are sorted into 30 special modes (disadvantageous side game situations) that are more disadvantageous to the player than the game situation. According to this, the player pays attention to the number of times the game is played until the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode after the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.
In this embodiment, the advantageous side game situation is a special mode of 50 times and the disadvantage side game situation is a special mode of 30 times. , an advantageous game situation and a disadvantageous game situation may be set.
In short, the advantageous game situation should be a game situation that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantageous game situation should be a game situation that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 reduces the number of times of completion of the game rounds until the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode after the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode to a number smaller than the end reference number of times. If it is smaller than the set threshold, it is sorted to the advantageous side game situation, and if it is larger than it, it is sorted to the disadvantaged side game situation. According to this, after the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode, the player pays attention to the game times up to the threshold set to the number of times smaller than the end reference number of times, so the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.
In this embodiment, after the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the game cycle is completed until the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode, and the threshold value set to the number of times smaller than the end reference number of times If it is smaller than this threshold, it is sorted to the advantageous side game situation, and if it is larger than this threshold, it is sorted to the unfavorable side game situation. In addition, it may be distributed to the disadvantageous side game situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special mode is an advantageous side game situation in which the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when 50 times (predetermined number of times) of the game are completed, and 30 times (less than the predetermined number of times). number of times), the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode. According to this, in the special mode of 30 times, the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times less than 50 is completed. It can be a disadvantageous gaming situation for Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10, as in the third embodiment, after shifting the game mode to the special mode by the main control device 60, the normal mode of whether to shift the game mode to the normal mode A normal mode lottery means for executing a mode lottery is provided, and the main controller 60 may shift the game mode to the normal mode when winning the normal mode lottery. In this case, the special mode may have an advantageous gaming situation with a low probability of winning the normal mode lottery and a disadvantageous gaming situation with a high probability of winning the normal mode lottery.
According to this, when the main controller 60 wins the normal mode lottery, the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Also, since the probability of winning the normal mode lottery is high in the disadvantageous game situation, the game situation can be made disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous game situation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process for executing an effect for the game round, an effect for the variable entering execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 47, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes after step S2112.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2117C.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, in step S2113 it determines the sort result type based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2114C, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the sort result type determined in step S2113.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in order to determine the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204C as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the "high frequency support mode result".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202C, it selects the effect A3 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), In step S2203, based on the contents of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode is the special mode when "big hit" is won in the lottery.

When the game mode is determined to be the special mode in step S2203, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2202C described above, and selects the effect A3 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204C, the opening and closing execution mode effect is produced. Select B3. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A3 and B3 corresponds to the time required to open and close the big winning opening 38a 15 times in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effect A3 and the effect B3.

Here, the effect A3 of this embodiment is different from the effect A of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect A of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's line "Rush into the RUSH!" 30(B) and 31(C)).
On the other hand, in the effect A3 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's line "Rush into RUSH! If you win, you'll get a bonus!" to inform the player that the game result is a "high-frequency support mode result" (shift to normal mode), and if a win is made within 10 spins, The subsequent special mode is different from the effect A of the first embodiment in that it informs that the game will continue until 50 game rounds are completed.

Also, the effect B3 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 causes a character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's line "You're in a 30-turn chance zone." !” informs the player that the game result is the “low-frequency support mode result” (shift to the special mode) (see FIGS. 30(D) and 31(E)).
On the other hand, in the effect B3 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the lines of the character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is different from the production B of the first embodiment in that it does not notify that the transition to .

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2114C. This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 51 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 51 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the processing of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S2117C onward.

In step S2117C, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a special mode command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that the special mode command has been received, in step S2118C, the MPU 92 executes special mode notification processing based on the contents of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above. Here, the special mode command includes the value of the number-of-games counter RTC.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for notifying the player of the transition to the special mode based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player that the special mode will be entered. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the character's line "30 turns. The player is notified of the shift to the special mode with "Chance Zone!" or "Chance Zone for 50 Spins!".

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that the special mode command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62 . After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure results" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 49, has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has distribution results of "high-frequency support mode results" and "low-frequency support mode results" as game results excluding "normal outlier results".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, contents such as the game state differ according to the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times. In addition, in the "high-frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A3. . In the "high-frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower opening 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A3. Furthermore, in the "high-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B3. . In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B3. Furthermore, in the "low-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the "special mode".

On the other hand, in the "special mode" game mode, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the game result based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A3. Furthermore, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Therefore, the player recognizes that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" or the "low-frequency support mode result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Regarding the flow after the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball wins (V wins) in the right ball entrance.
MPU 102 corresponds to successful V winning as shown in FIGS. Execute the production to do. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high-frequency support mode result", in step S2202C, effect A3 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. In this production A3, as shown in FIG. 50(B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's line "RUSH! If you win within 10 spins, you'll get a bonus!" to inform the player that the game result is a "high frequency support mode result" (shift to normal mode), and if the player wins within 10 spins. For example, it informs that the subsequent special mode will continue until 50 game rounds are completed.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 50(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 50(C)) to the end reference number of times of the high-frequency support mode based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204C, the effect B3 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is not equal to or greater than "90" (see FIG. 28A), in step S1404, the "30" is set to the value of the number-of-games counter RTC, and a special mode command is set in step S1110C. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that the special mode command has been received, in step S2118C, the MPU 92 executes special mode notification processing based on the contents of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, as shown in FIG. 50(D). The player is notified of the transition to the special mode by saying "It's a 30-turn chance zone!"

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 50(E). In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (30 times in FIG. 50(E)) up to the standard number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the command for variation. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

<Regarding the entry of the game ball into the right variable entry mechanism and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an effect for a game cycle when a game ball enters the lower operation opening triggered by winning the through gate in the high-frequency support mode.
In addition, the high-frequency support mode is a "jackpot winning" or "small winning" in the lottery, and if it is distributed to the "high-frequency support mode result" in the distribution lottery, or during the stay in the special mode When the lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution lottery results in a "low-frequency support mode result". Also, FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the winning result is "small winning".

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4B) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. , it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols. Further, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the reference number of times for ending the high-frequency support mode (95 times in FIG. 51(A)) on the symbol display device 51 based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has passed, the MPU 102 stops displaying part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4(B)) as shown in FIG. 51(A). In this state, the same combination of symbols (for example, "A") is displayed to suggest a stop result, and in this state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate a ready-to-win display. Transition to reach period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same alphabet (for example, "AAA") on the activated line L as a stop result, thereby obtaining the result of the lottery. (see FIG. 28(B)).

After the MPU 102 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same alphabet on the effective line L, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the open state by executing drive control of the blade member driving section 401c ( See FIG. 28(C)).
Further, the MPU 102 generates an effect for notifying the player of the opening of the blade member based on the blade member opening command received from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and informs the player to hit right by the character's words.

Then, the MPU 102 executes an effect for the variable entrance execution mode based on the command for the variable entrance execution mode received from the MPU 92 .
In the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 receives a V prize success command from the MPU 92 when the game ball enters the right ball entrance 404 (V prize) in the variable ball entry execution mode. A performance corresponding to the success of the V prize is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the character "V" on the entire surface of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and notifies the player that the game ball has won the right ball entrance 404 (V win). (See FIG. 28(D)).
Further, in the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, when the game ball does not enter the right ball entrance 404 (V prize), the MPU 102, based on the V prize failure command received from the MPU 92, determines the V prize. Execute the production corresponding to the failure. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the characters "Unfortunately" on the entire display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and informs the player that the game ball did not enter the right ball entrance 404 (V win). Notify (see FIG. 28(E)).

The MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to the success of the V winning when the game ball wins the right ball entrance 404 (V winning) in the variable ball winning execution mode. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high-frequency support mode result", in step S2202C, effect A3 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. In this effect A3, as shown in FIG. 51(B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the line of this character "RUSH! If you win within 10 spins, you will get a bonus." , the subsequent special mode is notified to continue until 50 game rounds are completed.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 51(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 51(C)) until the end reference number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204C, the effect B3 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is equal to or greater than "90" (see FIG. 51A), in step S1404, various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 are provided with The value of the number-of-games counter RTC is set to "50", and a special mode command is set in step S1110C. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that the special mode command has been received, in step S2118C, the MPU 92 executes special mode notification processing based on the contents of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, as shown in FIG. 51(D). The player is notified of the transition to the special mode by saying "It's a chance zone for 50 spins!"

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 51(E). In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 50 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (50 times in FIG. 51(E)) up to the standard number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the command for variation. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same actions and effects as (1) to (5) and (7) to (11) in the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained. can play.
(14) After shifting the game mode to the special mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 or 50 game rounds are completed. Pay attention to the number of times of digestion. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(15) The main controller 60 sets the number of times smaller than the end reference number of times after the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode until the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode. Based on the result of comparison with the threshold value, the player is divided into 50 special modes that are advantageous to the player and 30 special modes that are more disadvantageous to the player than the 50 special modes. After the game state is shifted to the support mode, attention is paid to the number of times the game cycle is completed until the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(16) The main controller 60 is set to a number smaller than the end reference number of times and the number of game rounds completed until the game state is switched to the opening/closing execution mode after the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode. is compared with a threshold value, and if it is smaller than this threshold value, it is sorted into a special mode of 50 times, so the player, after shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode, is set to a number smaller than the end reference number of times. Attention will be paid to the number of game rounds up to the threshold. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(17) The 30-time special mode is disadvantageous to the player compared to the 50-time special mode because the game mode shifts from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times less than 50 is completed. It can be a game situation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Modification of each embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes modifications, improvements, etc. within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning hole 38a once per round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the big winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or the game to the big winning opening 38a When the total winning number of balls reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the door 38b is closed again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the open/close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is the predetermined upper limit number. As a result, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers according to the distribution results. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger port for setting the opening/closing door 38b to a closed state when a game ball enters the game ball, and when a predetermined time elapses, this end trigger port is provided. It may be configured to allow the ball to enter the trigger hole.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, and the opening/closing door 38b is closed again. was set to On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 opens the opening/closing door 38b when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning to the big winning opening 38a occurs. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again.
(7) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has one type of opening/closing execution mode.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 had an open/close execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times with the upper limit duration. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening and closing execution mode different from these regarding the form of the upper limit duration time and the number of round game executions. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to set a plurality of types of opening and closing execution modes by varying the form of the upper limit duration time. may be configured to set a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes by making the . Furthermore, the upper limit duration time may be set so that the exact upper limit duration time is different, although the same pattern appears to the player.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. , and the selection rate may be changed according to the game result.
(9) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, and uses the type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win for the occurrence of the big win. On the other hand, when a big win occurs, the MPU 62 may use the random number counter C1 for the lottery for the type of the big win. In this case, the winning type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter area 64a of the RAM64.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player by setting the support mode. By doing so, a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and disadvantageous game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the reservation information related to the upper working opening 36 in the first result display section reservation area Ra, and stores the reservation information related to the lower working opening 37 in the second result display section. By storing in the reserved area Rb, the reserved information regarding the upper working port 36 and the reserved information regarding the lower working port 37 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information relating to the upper working opening 36 and the holding information relating to the lower working opening 37 together.
(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the lower operation opening 37 for completing the game cycle regardless of whether or not there is the reservation information related to the upper operation opening 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 for completion of the game cycle in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command resulting from analysis of the command to the display control device 100. The control of the display control device 100 was executed by. In response to this, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 90, thereby performing sound emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The commands sent from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(14) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60 .

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the effects for game rounds are not limited to the effects described in the above embodiments, and are optional. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 and the pattern display device 51 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of light-emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 51 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game round effect by combining these decorative members and light emitting means with the pattern display device 51 to operate.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and sorting lottery) based on the winning to the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, and then the main display section 45 And the symbol display device 51 executes the variable display, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37 as the result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the start of the variable display may display the results of In this case, after starting the variable display, before stopping the variable display, an internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the pattern, and displays the result of the internal lottery as a result of stopping the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may be made unidentifiable.
Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display section 45 .

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the symbol display device 51 may execute an effect for the game round on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 51 may set a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in the predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variably displayed or may not be displayed during the variably displayed symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may employ letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish, or may employ a combination of these. In addition, even if characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify are not used, mutually similar patterns or combinations thereof may be used to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the manager of the game parlor, for example, looks at the pattern display device 51 without looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round, in the same way as in the case of winning a big win lottery. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of .

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a game machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at the , and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player accessing the website and entering the password issued by operating the button etc. provided on the gaming machine into the gaming machine. You may

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been exemplified and explained as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine of another type different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured such that when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Also, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or other types of gaming machines such as majang ball machines.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments will be described below. Among the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions Modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic group A> Characteristic A1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
The game state is
A first game state (low frequency support mode) having a normal mode and a special mode game mode;
A second game state (high-frequency support mode) more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
In the normal mode of the first game state and in the second game state, the game state transition means selects one of the first game state and the second game state based on the result of the internal lottery. , and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, the first game state and the second game The game state is shifted to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery. Even when the game state is shifted to , the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts from a normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. The game state is changed, and when the game state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is changed to either the first game state or the second game state. game machine.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
In the first gaming state, the probability of entering the first starting ball entering section is higher than in the second starting ball entering section, and in the second gaming state, the probability is higher than the first starting ball entering section. A game machine characterized in that a game state more advantageous to the player than in the first game state is achieved by increasing the probability of a ball entering the second start ball-entering portion.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the probability that a ball enters the first starting ball entering section is higher in the first gaming state than in the second starting ball entering section, and the second gaming state corresponds to the first starting ball entering section. Since the probability that a ball enters the second starting ball entering part is higher than that of the ball entering part, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entering part in the first game state, and shoots the game ball at the second starting ball entering part. In the game state, the game ball is shot aiming at the second start ball entry part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in feature A3 of the invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable entry mechanism) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when a game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is determined by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed at the time of the game.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the first starting ball entering section Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the game ball, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second game state. It will be.
Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4 of the invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to feature A6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the game state transition means,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player plays in anticipation of transition to the high-frequency support mode.

However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature B Group> Feature B1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
The game state is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode);
A second game state (high-frequency support mode) more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The result of the internal lottery is
A first lottery result (low frequency support mode result) for shifting the game state to either the first game state or the second game state;
and a second lottery result (high-frequency support mode result) for shifting the game state to the second game state.

According to feature B1 of the present invention group, the results of the internal lottery are the first lottery result that shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state, and the game to the second game state. Since the game machine is provided with the second lottery result for shifting the state, the gaming machine can shift the game state to the second game state even when the first lottery result is obtained. It is possible to increase the chance of shifting the game state to the game state of . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
The first gaming state is
A normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the first game state when the first lottery result is obtained;
and a special mode for shifting the game state to the second game state when the first lottery result is obtained.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the first game state is the normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the first game state when the first lottery result is obtained, and the first lottery result. Since there is a special mode in which the game state is shifted to the second game state when the game state is changed, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the first game state. and play. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B2 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts from a normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. The game state is changed, and when the game state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is changed to either the first game state or the second game state. game machine.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
In the first gaming state, the probability of entering the first starting ball entering section is higher than in the second starting ball entering section, and in the second gaming state, the probability is higher than the first starting ball entering section. A game machine characterized in that a game state more advantageous to the player than in the first game state is achieved by increasing the probability of a ball entering the second start ball-entering portion.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, the probability that a ball enters the first starting ball entering section is higher in the first gaming state than in the second starting ball entering section, and the second gaming state is the first starting ball entering section. Since the probability that a ball enters the second starting ball entering part is higher than that of the ball entering part, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entering part in the first game state, and shoots the game ball at the second starting ball entering part. In the game state, the game ball is shot aiming at the second start ball entry part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in feature B4 of the invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable entry mechanism) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when a game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is determined by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed at the time of the game.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the first starting ball entering section. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the ball, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second game state. It will be.
Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B5 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to feature B6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B5 of the present invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to feature B7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B7 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode.

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B7 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game state to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the game state shift means,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to feature B9 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high-frequency support mode while playing the game.

However, since the transition destinations of the first game state and the second game state are associated with the result of the internal lottery, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic group C> Characteristic C1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
The game state is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode);
A second game state (high-frequency support mode) more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The first gaming state is
normal mode and
a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode;
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the special mode when the game state is shifted to the first game state, and the normal mode when the game state is shifted to the second game state. A game machine characterized by shifting the game mode to.

According to feature C1 of the present invention group, the first game state includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of transitioning to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode, and the game state transition means includes: When the game state is shifted to the first game state, the game mode is shifted to the special mode, and when the game state is shifted to the second game state, the game mode is shifted to the normal mode. Even when the game state is shifted to the first game state, the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts from a normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. The game state is changed, and when the game state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is changed to either the first game state or the second game state. game machine.

According to feature C2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C2 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
In the first gaming state, the probability of entering the first starting ball entering section is higher than in the second starting ball entering section, and in the second gaming state, the probability is higher than the first starting ball entering section. A game machine characterized in that a game state more advantageous to the player than in the first game state is achieved by increasing the probability of a ball entering the second start ball-entering portion.

According to feature C3 of the present invention group, the probability that a ball enters the first starting ball entering section is higher in the first gaming state than in the second starting ball entering section, and the second gaming state corresponds to the first starting ball entering section. Since the probability that a ball enters the second starting ball entering part is higher than that of the ball entering part, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entering part in the first game state, and shoots the game ball at the second starting ball entering part. In the game state, the game ball is shot aiming at the second start ball entry part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in feature C3 of the invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable entry mechanism) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when a game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is determined by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed at the time of the game.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the first starting ball entering section. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the ball, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second game state. It will be.
Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4 of the present invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to feature C6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the predetermined number of game rounds is completed after the game mode is shifted to the special mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the game state transition means,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to feature C8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player plays in anticipation of transition to the high-frequency support mode.

However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature D Group> Feature D1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
The game state is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode);
A second game state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The first gaming state is
normal mode and
a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode;
The game state transition means includes normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery to determine whether to transition the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to feature D1 of the present invention group, the first game state includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode. Even when the game state is shifted to the first game state, the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. Since the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts from a normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. The game state is changed, and when the game state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is changed to either the first game state or the second game state. game machine.

According to feature D2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means changes the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D2 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
In the first gaming state, the probability of entering the first starting ball entering section is higher than in the second starting ball entering section, and in the second gaming state, the probability is higher than the first starting ball entering section. A game machine characterized in that a game state more advantageous for the player than the first game state is achieved by increasing the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball-entering portion.

According to feature D3 of the present invention group, in the first gaming state, the probability of entering the first starting ball entering section is higher than in the second starting ball entering section. Since the probability that a ball enters the second starting ball entering part is higher than that of the ball entering part, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entering part in the first game state, and shoots the game ball at the second starting ball entering part. In the game state, the game ball is shot aiming at the second start ball entry part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D3 of the invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable entry mechanism) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when a game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is determined by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed at the time of the game.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the first starting ball entering section. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the ball, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second game state. It will be.
Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player plays in anticipation of transition to the high-frequency support mode.

However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature group E> Feature E1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
The game state is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode);
a second game state (high-frequency support mode) that continues until the end reference number of game rounds is completed and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state;
The game state transition means shifts from a normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. After the state is changed and the game state is changed to the second game state, the number of times the game cycle is completed until the game state is changed to the specific control state is set to a number smaller than the end reference number of times. Based on the result of comparison with the threshold value, an advantageous side game situation (50 times special mode) that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous side game situation (30 times special mode) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side game situation ) and a gaming machine characterized by being distributed to.

According to feature E1 of the present invention group, the game state transition means includes the number of times of completion of game rounds and the end reference number of times until the game state is shifted to the specific control state after the game state is shifted to the second game state. Based on the result of comparison with a threshold value set to a smaller number of times, the game is sorted into an advantageous game situation that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game situation that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous game situation. The player pays attention to the number of times the game cycle is completed until the game state is changed to the specific control state after the game state is changed to the second game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means sets a number of times smaller than the number of completed game rounds until the game state is shifted to the specific control state after the game state is shifted to the second game state, and the end reference number of times. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the game is smaller than the threshold, it is sorted to the advantageous game situation, and when it is larger than the threshold, it is sorted to the disadvantageous game situation.

According to feature E2 of the group of the present inventions, the game state transition means includes the number of times of completion of game rounds and the end reference number of times after the game state is shifted to the second game state until the game state is shifted to the specific control state. is compared with a threshold set to a number of times smaller than the threshold, and if it is smaller than this threshold, the game state is assigned to the advantage side game state, so the player, after shifting the game state to the second game state, can complete the end reference number of times. Attention will be paid to game rounds up to a threshold set to a number smaller than . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E2 of the invention group,
The first gaming state is
normal mode and
a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode;
The game state shifting means shifts the game mode to one of the normal mode and the special mode when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state.

According to feature E3 of the present invention group, the first game state includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode. Even when the game state is shifted to the first game state, the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. We will pay attention to whether or not Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in feature E3 of the invention group,
The game state transition means transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode,
The special mode is
the advantageous side game situation in which the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed;
A gaming machine characterized by having the disadvantageous side game situation in which the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game rounds less than a predetermined number is completed.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the predetermined number of game rounds is completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. In addition, in the disadvantageous side game situation, the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game rounds less than the predetermined number of times is completed, so the game situation is disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous side game situation. can be Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in feature E3 of the invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the game state transition means,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won,
The special mode is
the advantageous side gaming situation with a low probability of winning the normal mode lottery;
A gaming machine characterized by having the above-mentioned disadvantageous side game situation in which the probability of winning the normal mode lottery is high.

According to feature E5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Also, since the probability of winning the normal mode lottery is high in the disadvantageous game situation, the game situation can be made disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous game situation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E3 to feature E5 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to feature E6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E3 to feature E5 of the present invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to feature E7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E7 of the present invention group,
The game state shifting means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Amusement machine.

According to feature E8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in feature E8 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
In the first gaming state, the probability of entering the first starting ball entering section is higher than in the second starting ball entering section, and in the second gaming state, the probability is higher than the first starting ball entering section. A game machine characterized in that a game state more advantageous to the player than in the first game state is achieved by increasing the probability of a ball entering the second start ball-entering portion.

According to feature E9 of the present invention group, the probability that a ball enters the first start ball entry section is higher in the first game state than in the second start ball entry section, and the second game state is the first start ball entry section. Since the probability that a ball enters the second starting ball entering part is higher than that of the ball entering part, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entering part in the first game state, and shoots the game ball at the second starting ball entering part. In the game state, the game ball is shot aiming at the second start ball entry part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature E10.
In the gaming machine described in feature E9 of the invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable entry mechanism) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when a game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is determined by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed at the time of the game.

According to the feature E10 of the present invention group, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the first starting ball entering section Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the game ball, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second game state. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group E of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high-frequency support mode while playing the game.

However, the second gaming state continues until the end reference number of game rounds is completed, and the gaming machine, regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot lottery in the second gaming state, based on the result of the internal lottery, Since the game state is shifted, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Feature group F> Feature F1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable ball entry mechanism 40) that allows a game ball to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game state is
A first time-saving state (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable entry mechanism makes it easier to enter,
A second time-saving state (special mode low frequency support mode) in which it is difficult to enter the ball with the variable ball entry mechanism compared to the first time-saving state,
The game state shifting means shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism. .

According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the gaming state is a first time-saving state in which the variable ball-entering mechanism is easy to enter, and the variable ball-entering mechanism is more difficult to enter than the first time-saving state. Since the second time-saving state is provided, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism. can. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part,
The variable ball entry mechanism allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the player shoots the game ball toward the second path in the first time-saving state, and the game ball toward the first path in the second time-saving state. will be fired. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 or feature F2 of the present invention group,
The game state is
A first game state (low frequency support mode) having a game mode of the normal mode and the second time saving state as a special mode;
A second game state (high-frequency support mode) more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
In the normal mode of the first game state and in the second game state, the game state transition means selects one of the first game state and the second game state based on the result of the internal lottery. , and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, the first game state and the second game The game state is shifted to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery. Even when the game state is shifted to , the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F4.
In the game machine described in feature F3 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and the specific control A gaming machine characterized in that when the game state is shifted from the normal control state to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the first game state or the second game state.

According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F5.
In the game machine described in feature F3 or feature F4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to feature F5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F6.
In the game machine described in feature F3 or feature F4 of the present invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F7.
In the game machine described in feature F3 or feature F4 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode.

According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F8.
In the game machine described in feature F3 or feature F4 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the game state transition means,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the feature group F of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high-frequency support mode while playing the game.

In addition, as one type of such gaming machine, a game equipped with a variable ball entry mechanism that allows a game ball to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. machine is known.
This game machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game state transition means is provided for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
The high-frequency support mode is more advantageous to the player than the first game state because it is easier for the player to enter the variable ball-entering mechanism.

However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature G Group> Feature G1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part,
The game state is
A first time-saving state (high-frequency support mode) that is advantageous to the player by shooting the game ball toward the second path;
A second time-saving state (low-frequency support mode of a special mode) in which the player is in a disadvantageous situation compared to the first time-saving state by shooting the game ball toward the second path. prepared,
The game machine is
A variable ball entry mechanism (right side variable Equipped with a ball entry mechanism 40),
The game state shifting means shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism. .

According to the feature G1 of the present invention group, the game state is a first time-saving state in which the player is in an advantageous situation by shooting the game ball toward the second path, and the second path. By shooting the game ball in the second time-saving state in which the player is in a disadvantageous situation compared to the first time-saving state, when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism It is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means terminates the second time saving state when a game ball is shot toward the second path during stay in the second time saving state. .

According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means ends the second time saving state when a game ball is shot toward the second path during stay in the second time saving state. , the player shoots the game ball toward the second path in the first time-saving state, and shoots the game ball toward the first path in the second time-saving state. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 or feature G2 of the present invention group,
The game state is
A first game state (low frequency support mode) having a game mode of the normal mode and the second time saving state as a special mode;
A second game state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
In the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, the game state transition means selects one of the first game state and the second game state based on the result of the internal lottery. , and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, the first game state and the second game The game state is shifted to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery. Even when the game state is shifted to , the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and the specific control A gaming machine characterized in that when the game state is shifted from the normal control state to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the first game state or the second game state.

According to feature G4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 or feature G4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to feature G5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 or feature G4 of the present invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to feature G6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 or feature G4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode.

According to the feature G7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is shifted to the special mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G8.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 or feature G4 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the game state transition means,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to feature G8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group G of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high-frequency support mode while playing the game.

In addition, as one type of such gaming machine, a game equipped with a variable ball entry mechanism that allows a game ball to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. machine is known.
This game machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game state transition means is provided for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
The high-frequency support mode is more advantageous for the player than the first game state because it becomes easier for the player to enter the variable ball-entering mechanism.

However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.

10... Pachinko machine 35... General winning opening 36... Upper operating opening 37... Lower operating opening 38... Variable winning device 38a... Large winning opening 38b... Open/close door 38c... Variable winning driving section 39... Out Mouth 40 Right variable entry mechanism 51 Symbol display device 60 Main controller 62 MPU
90... Sound emission control device, 92... MPU, 100... Display control device, 102... MPU.

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. and is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player plays in anticipation of transition to the high-frequency support mode.
In addition, as one type of such gaming machine, a game equipped with a variable ball entry mechanism that allows a game ball to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. machine is known.
This game machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game state transition means is provided for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
The high-frequency support mode is more advantageous for the player than the first game state because it becomes easier for the player to enter the variable ball-entering mechanism.

JP 2011-235036 A

However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of a player to a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed on a game board, and entering the game balls flowing down the game area, Starting ball entry means for executing an internal lottery when a game ball enters the game ball; A variable ball entry mechanism is provided for allowing a game ball to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when a ball is played, and the game state is a first time-saving state in which a ball is easily entered into the variable ball entry mechanism. , a second time-saving state in which the ball is less likely to enter the variable ball-entering mechanism as compared with the first time-saving state, and the game state transition means is adapted to allow the game ball to enter the variable ball-entering mechanism. Then, the game state is shifted from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, the game ball entering the game ball flowing down the game area, and the game ball entering the game ball. A starting ball entry means for executing an internal lottery at the time of the game, and a game state transition means for shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery, and are executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means. A variable ball entry mechanism that allows a game ball to be entered based on the result of an internal lottery is provided, and the game state includes a first time-saving state in which the ball is easily entered by the variable ball entry mechanism, and the first state. A second time-saving state is provided in which the ball is less likely to enter the variable ball-entering mechanism compared to the time-saving state, and the game state transition means is advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the variable ball-entering mechanism. The game state is shifted from the normal control state to a specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine has the effect of being able to increase the attention of the player to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; front view of game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism Figure showing the display screen of the pattern display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an electric right/wrong table that stores random number values for winning electric power opening A diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a winning event A diagram showing a distribution table that stores random number values related to distribution destinations of winning types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode A diagram showing a flowchart of variable ball entry processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation end processing Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination processing for the opening/closing execution mode A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing the effect for the game round when the game ball enters the lower operation opening with the winning of the through gate as the trigger in the high-frequency support mode. Enlarged view showing the periphery of the right variable ball entry mechanism A diagram showing the effect for the opening and closing execution mode when the game ball wins the right ball entrance (V win) A diagram showing the effect for the game round when staying in the special mode A diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the second embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination processing for the opening/closing execution mode A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing the effect for the opening and closing execution mode when the game ball wins the right ball entrance (V win) A diagram showing the effect for the game round when staying in the special mode A diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the third embodiment of the present invention. Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation end processing A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination processing for the opening/closing execution mode A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing the effect for the opening and closing execution mode when the game ball wins the right ball entrance (V win) A diagram showing the effect for the game round when staying in the special mode A diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing a flowchart of the number-of-games counter setting process A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination processing for the opening/closing execution mode A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing the effect for the opening and closing execution mode when the game ball wins the right ball entrance (V win) A diagram showing the effect for the game round when the game ball enters the lower operation opening with the winning of the through gate as the trigger in the high-frequency support mode.

[First embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. This pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side, and an inner frame (not shown) disposed in front of the inner frame. A front door frame 13 supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side, and a front door frame 13 disposed behind the inner frame and rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

The gaming machine main body 12 has a locking device (not shown) provided at the leading end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by unlocking the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21 . In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be transparent and colorless.
In addition, the front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of light emitting means configured by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion A speaker unit 24 is provided on both the left and right sides of 23 and outputs sound effects according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21. there is

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are vertically arranged side by side and both are provided to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward, and a push button 25b that receives input of information when operated by the player. The upper tray 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 5) provided in the back pack unit, and aligns them in a row toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 5). It has the function of guiding. The push button 25b functions as an operating means for executing an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player when operated by the player.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 has a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower tray 26a. The shooting handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to shoot a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. do. The shooting handle 27 changes the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, ie, the momentum of shooting, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . Almost the entire area of this game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21 .
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 when the player rotates the shooting handle 27. The game ball that has been hit is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side of the side. In this embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning port 35 provided at each opening, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 36, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, and an out port 39 . In addition, the game board 31 includes a right variable ball entry mechanism 40 provided above the variable winning device 38, two through gates 41 provided on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, respectively, and a gate 41 provided on the upper right side. It has a main display device 42 and a variable display unit 43 and the like provided in the center. Furthermore, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 is provided with detection sensors 50a to 50d (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of game balls. The detection sensors 50a to 50d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 includes a detection sensor 50a, the upper operating opening 36 includes a detecting sensor 50b, the lower operating opening 37 includes a detecting sensor 50c, and the variable winning device 38 includes a detecting sensor 50d. It has The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50a to 50d. The detection sensors 50a to 50d may be of any type as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 35 . The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when a ball enters the lower operating port 37. - 特許庁The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 38.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

Out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of game board 31 . Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the out hole 39.例文帳に追加In addition, the out port 39 is provided with a detection sensor 50e (see FIG. 5) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out hole 39, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 50f (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and when the entry of a game ball occurs, an internal lottery is executed. The detection sensor 50f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each through gate 41, unlike the case where a ball enters a prize winning opening.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of game balls into the out port 39, entry of game balls into various winning ports is also expressed as winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 refers to continuing to flow down the game area without being ejected from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. A ball entering the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning a prize, like entering a ball into various winning holes.

The upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 are unitized as an operation port device and installed on the game board 31 . Each operating port 36, 37 is opened upward to allow the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged upward and the lower operating port 37 is arranged downward. are arranged vertically side by side. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory driving section 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer to the left and right. The open state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operation port 36 becomes narrower than one game ball. Also, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operation opening 36 becomes wider than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. can.

In addition, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state), and a lower It may be configured to switch between the operation port 37 and the state in which the game ball is likely to win. In addition, the lower operation port 37 may be configured to perform such switching not by setting the electric accessory 37a but by displacing the lower operation port 37. 37 may not include the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an open/close door 38b for opening and closing the large winning opening 38a, and an open/close door 38b. A variable winning drive unit 38c is provided.
In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side part side, it is possible to avoid the variable display unit 43 etc. and guide the game ball to the variable winning device 38, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, the lower operation opening 37, etc. (right hitting route ).

In addition, the player hits to the left with the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 27 set to a medium degree, and moves the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part of the game area is formed. By shifting to the upper left, the game ball can be guided to the upper working port 36, the lower working port 37, etc. (left-handed route).
Thus, in this embodiment, the game area is the first path (left a hitting route) and a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. .

Here, the game board 31 has a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38 . The cover 381 consists of a transparent (or translucent) panel 381a formed to make the variable winning device 38 visible from the front side, and an opaque panel 381a provided around the transparent panel 381a. and a panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window 21. FIG.

The big winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 50d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. 31, and an open state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. When the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
The right variable ball entry mechanism 40 includes, as shown in FIG. a guide passage 402 for guiding the game ball guided to the entrance of the guide passage 402, a switching portion 403 for switching the destination of the game ball guided by the guide passage 402, and a right ball entrance 404 provided at the guide destination of the guide passage 402. and left entrance 405 .

The guiding portion 401 includes a blade member 401a provided on the game board 31 so as to close an entrance formed on the right side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, and a blade member 401a centered on an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It has a pin 401b that rotatably supports the blade 401a, and a blade member driving section 401c that drives the blade member 401a.

The blade member 401a rotates counterclockwise around the pin 401b to be in a closed state (one-dot chain line in the figure) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is closed, and rotates clockwise around the pin 401b. It has an open state (solid line in the drawing) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is opened by moving. The blade member 401a is inclined so as to descend toward the inlet side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 in the open state.
The blade member driving section 401c sets the blade member 401a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the blade member 401a.

Therefore, when the blade member 401a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 401c, the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 through the blade member 401a using the inclination of the blade member 401a. (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member driving section 401c sets the blade member 401a to the closed state, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 (one-dot chain line in the figure).

The guide passage 402 is formed to have a width that does not allow a plurality of game balls to pass through the passage at the same time. Further, the guide passage 402 branches into two on the way, and has an upstream guide passage 402a positioned upstream of the branch and two downstream guide passages 402b and 402c positioned downstream. .

The upstream guide passage 402 a guides the game ball guided to the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 by the guiding portion 401 from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 to the branch position of the guide passage 402 . The upstream guide passage 402 a is inclined downward from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 toward the branch position of the guide passage 402 . Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 402 along the upstream guide passage 402a utilizing the inclination of the upstream guide passage 402a.

The downstream guide passage 402b is provided at a position close to the blade member 401a. Further, the downstream guide passage 402b is formed along the vertical direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 402. As shown in FIG. The downstream guide passage 402b guides the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 402 along the upstream guide passage 402a to the right ball entrance 404.例文帳に追加
The downstream guide passage 402c is provided at a position far from the blade member 401a. Further, the downstream guide passage 402c is formed along the vertical direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 402. As shown in FIG. This downstream guide passage 402 c guides the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 402 along the upstream guide passage 402 a to the left ball entrance 405 .

The switching unit 403 supports a plate 403a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 402b, and the plate 403a rotatably about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It has a pin 403b and a plate driving section 403c that drives the plate 403a.

The plate 403a rotates clockwise around the pin 403b, thereby closing the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402b (a two-dot chain line in the figure) and rotating counterclockwise around the pin 403b. As a result, the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402c is closed and the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402b is opened (solid line in the figure). In the closed state, the plate 403a is inclined downward toward the downstream guide passage 402c.
The plate driver 403c drives the plate 403a to set the plate 403a to either a closed state or an open state.

Therefore, when the plate 403a is set to the open state by the plate driving portion 403c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 is guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 402b, and then the right ball entrance. Enter the ball at 404 (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the plate 403a is set to the closed state by the plate driving portion 403c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 uses the inclination of the plate 403a to travel downstream through the plate 403a. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 402c, the ball enters the left ball entrance 405 (chain double-dashed line in the figure).

The right ball entrance 404 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. This right ball entrance 404 is equipped with a detection sensor 50g for detecting the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the right ball slot 404, unlike when a ball enters the various winning slots.

The left ball entrance 405 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. A game ball that has entered the left ball inlet 405 joins the game ball that has passed through the outlet 39 and is discharged from the game area. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the left ball hole 405, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Since the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when a ball is entered into the right ball entrance 404, the downstream guide passage 402b that guides the game ball to the right ball entrance 404 is equipped with an opening/closing execution mode. A letter "V" is displayed to indicate that the mode is to be changed.
In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the opening/closing execution mode when a ball enters the left ball entrance 405, the downstream guide passage 402c that guides the game ball to the left ball entrance 405 includes: A character "x" is displayed to indicate that the opening/closing execution mode is not to be entered.

Here, the blade member 401a and the plate 403a are normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. Then, in the internal lottery, when the transition to the variable ball entry execution mode is won and the variable ball entry execution mode is entered, the blade member 401a and the plate 403a are set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
In addition, the variable ball entry execution mode means that the blade member 401a is set to the open state, the game ball can be entered into the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, and the plate 403a is set to the open state or the closed state, and the right A mode in which a game ball can enter either the ball entrance 404 or the left ball entrance 405 . Further, in the variable ball-entering execution mode, the time (open period) from setting the plate 403a to the open state to setting it to the closed state again is set to the closed state after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. It is shorter than the time (open period) until it opens.
Specifically, the open period of the plate 403a is about 1/10 of the open period of the blade member 401a.

The main display device 42, as shown in FIG. It is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 . Also, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42 .

The main display portion 45 includes a first result display portion 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower working port 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 5). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 36. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. to display the results of If the result of this internal lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the variable-entering execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the variable ball entry execution mode. Further, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when a ball enters the right ball entrance 404 in the variable ball entry execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 function as starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. do.

The character object display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric operation open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and character object display unit 46 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited to this, and may be liquid crystal display devices, organic EL display devices, CRTs, It may also consist of other types of display devices such as dot matrix. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 51 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 52 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 51 . The upper part of the center frame 52 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display.
This symbol display device 51 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 51 performs the variable display in the first result display portion 45a of the main display portion 45 and when the second result display portion 45b of the main display portion 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or other display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 52 includes a first holding lamp portion 53 provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 51, a second holding lamp portion 54 provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 51, and a pattern display. and a third holding lamp portion 55 provided in the upper region of the device 51 .

The first reservation lamp portion 53 is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The first holding lamp portion 53 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 51. FIG.
The second reservation lamp part 54 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp portion 54 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 51. FIG.

The third reservation lamp portion 55 is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp section 55 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display section 46 .
It should be noted that each of the holding lamp units 53 to 55 may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of the pattern display device 51. FIG.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device. Specifically, FIG. 4(A) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in the case of executing the variable display of the symbols triggered by the winning of the upper working port 36, and FIG. 4(B). 10] is a view showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the variable display of symbols is executed with the winning of the lower opening 37 as a trigger. [FIG.
As shown in FIG. 4, the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is divided into three columns of display areas. Column Z3 is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 4, the center line of each display area is shown by the dashed-dotted line.

When the variable display of the pattern is executed with the winning of the upper working port 36 as a trigger, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 consists of numbers "1" to "8" as shown in FIG. 4(A). Eight kinds of patterns are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and are arranged such that "1" follows "8".
When the variable display of the pattern is executed with the winning of the lower opening 37 as a trigger, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 consists of alphabetical letters "A" to "C" as shown in FIG. 4(B). The three types of patterns are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and are arranged such that "A" follows "C".
Therefore, by looking at the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, the player can confirm whether the variable display of the pattern is executed with the winning of any of the upper and lower working ports 36 and 37 as a trigger. can do.

The symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game round is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L. end with a state
In other words, the game round means the period from when the variable display is started on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 based on the winning to the operation ports 36 and 37 until the predetermined stop result is displayed.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 51 is not limited to this, and the pattern display device 51 is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of pictures and numbers or letters instead of only numbers or letters, or may be pictures only.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 5, comprises a main controller 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a success/failure table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, an electric service success/failure table storage area 63c, and a reach table storage area 63d.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a pending ball storage area 64b, an electric power pending area 64c, and various flag storage areas 64d.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. Further, the output ports of the MPU 62 include an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. It is connected to the wing member drive section 401c that opens and closes the plate 401a, the plate drive section 403c that opens and closes the plate 403a, the main display section 45, and the accessory display section .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c to open and close the big winning opening 38a. In the variable ball-entering execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the blade member driving section 401c to open and close the blade member 401a, and executes drive control of the plate driving section 403c to open and close the plate 403a. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 50a to 50g are connected to the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, the right ball entrance 404, and each through gate 41. They are provided in one-to-one correspondence. The MPU 62 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) for various prize winning ports, the out port 39, the right ball entrance 404, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50a to 50g. In addition, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 .

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of a win, uses the type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the win, and reaches the lottery for whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display. Random number counter C3 is used. Also, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS for determining the display continuation time on the main display section 45 and the pattern display device 51. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory open counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 5).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 5) provided as acquired information storage means.

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a combination of the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in time series to each area Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the upper working port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, the reservation area Ra for the first result display section is provided with four storage areas, so that up to four winnings of game balls into the upper operation opening 36 are reserved. The first result display reserved area Ra includes storage areas for writing the reserved numbers stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reservations related to the upper working port 36 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a combination of the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in time series to each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the lower opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the lower operation opening 37 are reserved. In addition, the second result display portion reservation area Rb includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41.例文帳に追加
Then, based on the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric accessory open lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of enabling game balls to enter the lower operation opening 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is low. and a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an electric right/wrong table that stores values of random numbers that win electric power to be released.
Among the values of the electric role item opening counter C4, the value of the random number that wins the occurrence of the electric role opening is stored in the electric role right/wrong table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 provided as the electric right/wrong information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (Refer to FIG. 5) is stored as an electric service right/wrong table (electric power right/wrong information group).

7A and 7B for the high-frequency support mode. It also has an electric service propriety table (high-frequency electric service propriety information group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of the opening of the electric role by comparing these electric role right/wrong tables with the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer.

These electric right/wrong tables have results (right/wrong results of the electric right/wrong) of a plurality of occurrences of opening of the electric right, ie, "won an electric right" and "losing result".
Here, "Electric role open winning" is the electric role success/failure result in which the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is placed in the electric role open state.

More specifically, in a game state in which the electric role success/failure table for the low-frequency support mode is referred to during the lottery for the occurrence of the electric role opening, as shown in FIG. There is one random number value. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery wins the electric role opening with a probability of 1/251.
In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, except for the value of the random number that becomes "Electrical role open winning", the electric role opening is not won and the result is "Loss result".

On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the electric role success/failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to during the lottery for the occurrence of the electric role release, as shown in FIG. is 1.
Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the random number value other than the "loss result" wins the occurrence of the electric power release and becomes the "electric power release result". In other words, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery wins the electric role opening with a probability of about 250/251.
In addition, the value and number of random numbers stored in each electric role success/failure table are arbitrary. good.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper working opening 36 than the lower working opening 37 . In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will enter the lower operation opening 37 rather than the upper operation opening 36 is higher.
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state when the electric role opening is won, compared to the low-frequency support mode. In addition, for example, the high-frequency support mode is configured to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state for one opening time longer than the low-frequency support mode when winning the electric role opening generation. may Also, for example, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electrical open state is shortened compared to the low-frequency support mode. may be configured. In addition, for example, the high-frequency support mode is the minimum guaranteed time (1 The duration of the variable display of times) may be configured to be shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a short reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved times may be It may be configured to be shorter than in the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode changes the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Thus, in this embodiment, the low frequency support mode functions as a first game state in which the probability of hitting the upper working opening 36 is higher than the lower working opening 37 . In addition, the high frequency support mode is a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode because the probability of the ball entering the lower operation port 37 is higher than that of the upper operation port 36. Function.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . Also, the winning random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 like the winning random number counter C1.

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper working port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower working port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery (winning lottery) based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a success/failure table storing values of random numbers that are selected for winning.
Among the values of the winning random number counter C1, the values of the random numbers that are selected for winning are stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the winning/failure information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (whether or not information group).

The right/wrong table includes a first right/wrong table (first right/wrong information group) shown in FIG. 8(a) and a second right/wrong table (second right/wrong information group) shown in FIG. 8(b).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for winning (occurrence of a big win or occurrence of a small win) by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first success/failure table shows the value of the winning random number counter C1 shifted from the first result display section reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the winning random number counter C1 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36. This is a table that is referred to when performing a lottery for occurrence. In this first success/failure table, as shown in FIG. 8(a), there are two random number values of "7" and "77" for "jackpot win".
Also, there are 100 random number values of "100 to 199" for the "minor winning". In other words, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 36, the probability of winning a small prize is 1/6.
Furthermore, except for the values of random numbers that result in "big win winning" and "minor winning winning", the "normal result" is obtained without winning the big win.

The second success/failure table shows the value of the winning random number counter C1 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the winning random number counter C1 based on the winning to the lower opening 37. It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for winning. As shown in FIG. 8(b), this second success/failure table has 480 random number values "0 to 479" for "minor winning". In other words, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation opening 37, the probability of winning the "small win" is 4/5.
Here, the random number value for "big win" and "minor win" stored in the first success/failure table is included in the random number value for "small win" stored in the second success/failure table. there is

In addition, except for the value of the random number that becomes "small winning", it does not win small winning and becomes "normal loss result".
The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary. In addition, the random number value for "small winning" stored in the second winning table does not include the random number value for "big winning" and "small winning" stored in the first winning table. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values for the "big win win" and the "minor win win" stored in the first success/fail table.

Here, "jackpot winning" is the success/fail result of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, "small win winning" is the success/fail result of shifting to the variable entry execution mode. Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when a ball enters the right ball entrance 404 in the variable ball entry execution mode.
In the following description, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode due to the occurrence of a ball entering the right ball entrance 404 is also expressed as occurrence of a big win.

Here, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 36, the probability of winning the "small win" is 1/6, and as described above, the open period of the plate 403a is the blade member Since it is about 1/10 of the open period of 401a, the probability of shifting to the variable ball-entering execution mode when winning a prize in the upper operation port 36 and winning a big win is about 1/60.
In addition, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation opening 37, the probability of winning the "small winning" is 4/5, and as described above, the opening period of the plate 403a Since it is about 1/10 of the opening period of , the probability of shifting to the variable ball-entering execution mode when winning a prize in the lower operation port 37 and winning a big win is about 1/12.5.

Next, the hit type counter C2 will be described. For example, the hit type counter C2 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored in the first result display portion reservation area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, based on the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the type of hit when a hit occurs.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values relating to distribution destinations of winning types.
As shown in FIG. 9, the values of the random numbers related to the distribution destination of the winning type are stored in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 9(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 9(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a winning type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is for the value of the winning type counter C2 shifted from the first result display section reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the winning type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36. It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for winning types.
As shown in FIG. 9A, the first distribution table includes "low-frequency support mode result (distribution result corresponding to low-frequency support mode)" and "high-frequency support mode result (distribution result corresponding to high-frequency support mode)". Result)” is set as a distribution destination. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the hit type counter C2, “0 to 14” are distributed to “low frequency support mode results”, and “15 to 29” are distributed to “high frequency support mode result”.
Therefore, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning in the upper operation port 36, the probability of "low frequency support mode result" is 50%, and the probability of "high frequency support mode result" is also 50%. be.

In the second distribution table, the value of the winning type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the winning type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower opening 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for winning types.
As shown in FIG. 9B, the second distribution table includes "low-frequency support mode result (distribution result corresponding to low-frequency support mode)" and "high-frequency support mode result (distribution result corresponding to high-frequency support mode)". Result)” is set as a distribution destination. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the hit type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low frequency support mode results”, and “10 to 29” are distributed to “high frequency support mode result”.
Therefore, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower operation port 37, the probability of obtaining the "low-frequency support mode result" is about 33%, and the probability of obtaining the "high-frequency support mode result" is about 67%. %.

The "low-frequency support mode result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, except when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This low-frequency support mode continues until a jackpot occurs.
The "high-frequency support mode result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36, and the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) to determine whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The ready-to-win display is an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in "big winning" or "minor winning" but results in "normal failure".
Specifically, the MPU 62 stores in the ready-to-win table and the reserved ball storage area 64b in the case where the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit" or a "minor win" and results in a "normal loss". By comparing with the value of a ready-to-win random number counter C3, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display, and when the ready-to-win display is to be generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-win table is a table that stores random number values related to the generation of the ready-to-win display, and is stored in the ready-to-win table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 (see FIG. 5).

Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the winning lottery and "high frequency support mode result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 51 has the same odd number as the stop result. A symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. - 特許庁Further, in the case of "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and "low frequency support mode result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 51 displays the symbols having the same even number as the stop result. are stopped on the effective line L. Furthermore, in the case of a "small winning lottery" in the winning lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the symbol display device 51, as a result of stopping, does not display a combination of symbols having the same number. , a combination of special symbols having different numbers which are not selected when a ``normal failure result'' is obtained in the success/fail lottery is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. - 特許庁In the case of a "small win" in the winning lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the symbol display device 51 displays the combination of symbols having the same alphabet as the effective line L as a result of the stop. Pause on top.

The ready-to-win display is performed when a combination of symbols having the same number or the same alphabetic character is finally stopped and displayed (when a "big win" is won in a lottery, or when a prize is entered in the lower operation port 37). In the case of "small winning" in the winning lottery), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, when the special symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed (when "small win" is won in the lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operation port 36), the reach display is performed. It does not occur regardless of the value of the random number counter C3.

In the ready-to-win display mode, some of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are displayed on the activated line L. By causing the stationary display, the same combination of symbols is displayed to indicate the result of stopping, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, by generating the ready-to-win display, the pachinko machine 10, after the start of the variable display on the pattern display device 51 and before displaying the predetermined stop result, "wins a big win" or "wins a small win" in the winning lottery. The player can be made to expect that he or she has won the prize.

Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected performance as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 51. - 特許庁The expected performance means that after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 51 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, it is assumed that "big win" or "small win" is won in the winning lottery. It means a performance that makes people expect. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-win display and advance notice display.

The notice display is better than the case where the "big hit" or "small hit" is won in the lottery, and the "normal result" is obtained without becoming the "big hit" or "small hit" in the lottery. is also an expectation production that makes it easier for production to occur. Instead of facilitating the occurrence of effects, this advance notice display may facilitate the selection of effects with a low appearance rate, or may be combined.
While the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display is performed by the main control device 60, the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The mode of the advance notice display is that of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and some of the symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z1) is stopped on the activated line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2, Z3) are variably displayed or ready-to-win display is generated, a predetermined character etc. are displayed on the display screen G as moving images. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is
Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display continuation time on the main display section 45 and the pattern display continuation time on the pattern display device 51 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, judges the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 50a to 50d corresponding to various winning holes have detected the winning of game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if it reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product opening counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Note that the MPU 62 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service reservation area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp section 55 and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the third suspension lamp section 55 based on a command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the third reservation lamp portion 55 is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the working opening. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the timer interrupt processing.
The prize winning process for the operating port will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 50b corresponding to the upper operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has entered the upper operating port 36 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won in the upper working port 36, in step S202, the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra is grasped, and the reserved number is determined. The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display section reservation area Ra as the first start-up reservation storage number RaN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 50c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the lower working opening 37, it ends the winning processing for the working opening. In addition, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as the second start pending storage number RbN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number of start suspension memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not there is
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number N of start pending memories is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the operating opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the value of the start pending memory number N and updates it in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores the set of values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the free storage area of the reserved area for the result display section. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, each of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. A set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first result display portion pending area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S206.
For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 stores "4" in the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process are stored as suspension information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display section storage area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension storage number RbN updated in step S206. do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first reservation lamp section 53 or the second reservation lamp section 54, and transmits this set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the first reservation lamp section 53 or the second reservation lamp section 54 based on a command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In addition, the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 or the lower operation opening 37 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the first reservation lamp part 53 or the second reservation lamp part 54 is this reservation number The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 in a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Run.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70 Send. Also, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether commands for effects such as commands corresponding to effects for game times, effects for variable ball-entering execution modes, and commands corresponding to effects for opening/closing execution modes are set. When it is determined that a command for effect is set, the command for effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. - 特許庁

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . In addition, when the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes a win/fail lottery and a distribution lottery, determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 51, and determines the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. decision of information related to
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as the opening/closing execution mode, the variable ball-entering execution mode, the low-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode.
The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round has ended. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is set to 3 seconds and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, and when it reaches 750 times, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. In addition, when the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S<b>306 , the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided in the lower working port 37 . In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 . Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes game ball launch control processing. In this game ball shooting control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply/shooting control device 80 to execute shooting control for shooting a game ball based on the rotation of the shooting handle 27 by the player. Specifically, the power supply/shooting control device 80 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 . Further, the power supply/shooting control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64 or not. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 . The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing of step S312 and subsequent steps without executing the processing of step S309 and subsequent steps. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, MPU62 prohibits the access to RAM64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag has not been set, in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether the current normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet arrived, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311. , the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeats steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred, the next normal process is executed by executing step S301 again. Begin normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to become operable. ) has passed.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not passed in step S402, it repeats the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has passed in step S402, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the processing of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, MPU62 permits the access to RAM64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, it executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
At step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated at step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (power failure processing) of the normal processing, and if they match, , the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the processing from step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411, and timer interrupt in step S412. Allow the process to occur, and shift to the above-described normal process.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the game is in the opening/closing execution mode, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502 it determines whether the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game cycle progressing process in steps S506 to S509.

First, the processing for starting a game round in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these numbers of reservations is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area A data setting process is executed to set the pending information stored in Rb for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", it executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section of steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the operation to the upper operation opening 36 is performed. The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion pending area Ra to update the value.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 45, out of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b, starts the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working hole 36. indicates that the

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp section 53 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the first reservation lamp portion 53 as the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 decreases.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37. indicates that the

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp section 54 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the second reservation lamp portion 54 as the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S717 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the RAM 64 has the second result display flag set.
When the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S701, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 36 starts the variable display. Therefore, in step S702, the first right/wrong table (see FIG. 8(a)) is read from the right/wrong table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S701, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 , the second right/wrong table (see FIG. 8(b)) is read from the right/wrong table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. In this success/failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success/failure table read out in step S702 or S703 to obtain the result of the success/failure lottery (result of success/failure). judge. In addition, as mentioned above, the winning result is either "jackpot winning", "minor winning", or "normal result", and even if the support mode is low frequency support mode The same is true even if there is

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning result determined in step S704 is a winning occurrence ("big winning winning" or "small winning winning"). If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the result of winning is that a win has occurred, the MPU 62 executes the processes from step S706 onward, and if it determines that the result of winning in step S705 is that a win has not occurred, then steps S714 and after. process.

First, the processing (processing after step S706) when the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the winning result is the occurrence of winning will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 36 starts a variable display. Therefore, the first distribution table (see FIG. 9A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S707.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 , the second sorting table (see FIG. 9B) is read from the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S708.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU62 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this allocation determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the win type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the allocation table read out in step S707 or step S708, thereby determining the result of the allocation lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "big hit".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S710 that the win/loss result is "big hit winning", in step S711, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the big win result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 45a of the main display portion 45 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. and stores the determined information in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 compares the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and displays the final result on the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45. Information relating to a pattern to be displayed in a static manner is determined. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 so as to be different for each sorting result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the win/loss result is not "big win winning" in step S710 (if it determines that the win/loss result is "small win winning"), in step S712, the small win result Execute the stop result setting process for In this stop result setting process for small winning results, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 45a or the second result display portion 45b of the main display portion 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for small winning results stored in advance in the ROM 63, and finally stops and displays on the first result display portion 45a or the second result display portion 45b of the main display portion 45. Determines information related to the pattern to be drawn.

After executing the process of step S711 or step S712, the MPU 62 sets a flag corresponding to the sorting result determined in step S709 in the RAM 64 in step S713. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is the "low-frequency support mode result", it sets the low-frequency support mode result flag to indicate that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result". If specified, the high frequency support mode result flag is set. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S715.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the processing (processing after step S714) when the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the hit/fail result does not occur will be described.
In step S714, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stop result setting process for the out-of-normal result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal outlier result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, thereby determining information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the normal outlier result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the big win result and the stop result table for the small win result.

After executing any of the processes of steps S711, S712, and S714, the MPU 62 executes display duration time (display duration) setting processing in step S715.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 .

In addition, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated on the pattern display device 51 . Specifically, when the winning result determined in step S704 is "big win winning", the MPU 62 determines that the winning result determined in step S704 is "small win winning" based on the winning to the lower operation opening 37. , or when the success/failure result determined in step S704 is "normal failure result" and winning the reach generation lottery, it is determined that the reach display occurs. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Run a reach generation lottery.

When determining that the reach display occurs, the MPU 62 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63 d of the ROM 63, so that the fluctuation type counter obtained from the fluctuation type counter buffer A display continuation time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, so that the fluctuation acquired from the fluctuation type counter buffer A display continuation time corresponding to the value of the type counter CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. Therefore, the display continuation time for consuming the pending information related to the upper working port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the upper working port 36 increases. Further, the display duration time when the pending information related to the lower working port 37 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the lower working port 37 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the pending number is the same, the display duration time in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as increasing the display duration as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and support mode It may be configured so that it does not fluctuate. Alternatively, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

At step S716, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S301 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the command for variation and the type command set in step S716 to the sound emission control device 90. FIG.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

The variation command includes information related to display duration. Also, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are mutually different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information on the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

The type command includes information regarding the win/fail result. In other words, the type command includes each information related to "big hit winning", "minor winning winning", and "ordinary failure result" as information related to win/fail results. Also, the type command includes information related to the sorting result. In other words, the type command includes each information related to the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result" as the information related to the sorting result.
In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command includes information regarding the game result.

In step S717, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first Since it indicates that the result display section 45a is to start the variable display, the first result display section 45a is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the second Since it indicates that the result display section 45b is to start the variable display, the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S715 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 controls the display of the main display section 45 so that the main display section 45 displays the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during the variable display. Note that the fluctuation end processing will be described later in detail.

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is being cheated to behave in the same manner as when winning a lottery for generating a big win. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 instead of the main display section 45 to determine whether or not he or she has won the winning lottery. , the degree of attention to the display screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S820 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S811.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable entry execution mode is in progress.
It should be noted that the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable entry execution mode is on by referring to the variable entry execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the variable entering execution mode flag when shifting to the variable entering execution mode, and clears the variable entering execution mode flag when ending the variable entering execution mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable ball entry execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S803.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable ball-entering execution mode is in effect, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S816.

First, the processing (processing after step S803) when it is determined in step S802 that the MPU 62 is not in the variable entry execution mode will be described.
In step S803, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the variable display of the main display unit 45 has ended, in step S804, the winning result is a win ("big win" or "small win"). It is determined whether or not.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the winning result is not the occurrence of winning, the game state transition processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is the occurrence of a hit, it determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "small win" in step S805.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the win/loss result is "small hit winning", in step S806, after setting the flag during the variable entry execution mode in the RAM 64, the game state transition processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the win/loss result is not "small win" (if it determines that the win/loss result is "big win"), in step S807, the RAM 64 is opened and closed. After setting the running mode flag, the process from step S808 is executed.

At step S808, the MPU 62 sets "15" to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the open/close execution mode ends under the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number

In step S809, the MPU 62 sets "1000" to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this way, the MPU 62 sets the wait time for opening to the timer counter T in step S809 regardless of the type of sorting result. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of sorting result.
The wait time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be slightly different according to the type of sorting result, for example, to the extent that the players recognize the same.
Also, for example, the wait time for the opening is greatly different between the distribution result of the "low-frequency support mode result" and the distribution result of the "high-frequency support mode result". , it may be configured such that it is greatly different depending on the type of sorting result.

At step S810, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the distribution result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the processing (processing after step S811) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 62 executes a big winning opening opening/closing process.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S916 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the large winning opening 38a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the big winning opening 38a is open in step S901, it executes the processing from step S906.

First, in step S901, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is not open will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it determines in step S903 whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. judge.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S904, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
In the following, a detailed description will be given of the big winning opening opening process in step S904.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1003 as shown in FIG.
At step S1001, "8" is set to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and "15000" is set to the timer counter T at step S1002. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

In step S1003, the MPU 62 executes processing for opening the big winning opening 38a.
In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1001 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1002 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, since the upper limit duration time is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing period of the game balls, the upper limit of 8 game balls is set to the big winning hole. Winning 38a is easy.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S905 will be explained with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S905 after executing the big winning opening opening process in step S904. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S905 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S906) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is being opened in step S901 will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1002 of the big winning opening opening process has passed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S907.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S910.

In step S907, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special prize opening 38a. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 38a, in step S908, the value of the prize winning counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S909, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, or if it determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less , in step S910, a closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c.

In step S911, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S912, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.
In step S913, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S914. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S914 is the open standby time from when the open/close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state again. stipulates the time. In addition, in this embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S915.
In step S915, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of sorting result, like the waiting time for the opening.
Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of sorting result to such an extent that the players recognize the same.
Also, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the "low-frequency support mode result" distribution result and the "high-frequency support mode result" distribution result. , it may be configured such that it is greatly different depending on the type of sorting result.

At step S916, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S916 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S812 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S811, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less in step S812.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, it determines in step S813 whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S814 the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared.
In step S815, the MPU 62 executes transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1108 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), The process after step S1105 is executed.
First, the processing (processing after step S1102) when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" in step S1101 will be described.

At step S1102, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in RAM 64 is cleared.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes with different support modes to be shifted to after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal mode in which the support mode is set after the end of the opening and closing execution mode according to the distribution result of the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result", and the "low frequency support Mode Result” and “High Frequency Support Mode Result” have a special mode as a game mode in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution result.

The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which game mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, the game mode is set to the normal mode.

At step S1104, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "100". After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1105) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" will be described.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), in step S1105, It is determined whether a special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 or not.

When the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (when it determines that the game mode is the special mode), it executes the processing after step S1102 described above. In other words, when the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 switches the support mode to high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, regardless of the result of distributing the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result." Set to support mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S1106, it is stored in the RAM 64. clear the high-frequency support flag. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

At step S1107, the MPU 62 sets a special mode flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the special mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.
At step S1108, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "30". After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until 30 games, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when 30 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In addition, after executing the process of step S1108, the MPU 62 clears the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37 .

In this way, when a win occurs in the winning lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "high frequency support mode result", the game state is the open/close execution mode regardless of the current game state. After completion, transition to high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without winning in the winning lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

Also, if a hit occurs in the winning lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is "low frequency support mode result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode if the game mode is a special mode. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode, and if the game mode is the normal mode, it shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without winning in the winning lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low-frequency support mode continues at least until a win occurs in the winning lottery. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, when no win occurs in the lottery, that is, when the result of the lottery is "normal result", the game state does not shift.

Here, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is included in the variation command described above. In addition, information relating to the game mode (information relating to whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the aforementioned opening command.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S816 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable entry execution mode is on, and when it is determined that the variable entry execution mode is on, executes the processing from step S816 onwards.

In step S816, the MPU 62 executes variable ball entry execution processing.
The variable ball entry execution process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variable ball entry execution process.
In the variable ball entry execution process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1215 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the blade member 401a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the blade member 401a is not in the open state, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1202 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the blade member 401a is being opened, it executes the processing from step S1207.

First, the processing (processing after step S1202) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the blade member 401a is not open in step S1201 will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 executes blade member opening execution processing. In this blade member opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the open state by executing drive control of the blade member driving section 401c.

In step S1203, a blade member open command is set. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the blade member open command set in step S1204 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the blade member 401a has been set to the open state based on the blade member open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S1204, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag or the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1204 that the high frequency support flag or special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, it sets the timer counter T to "1000" in step S1205. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 2 seconds. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the variable ball entry execution process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1204 that the high frequency support flag or the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (if it determines that the low frequency support mode of the normal mode), then step At S1206, the timer counter T is set to "50". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.1 sec. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the variable ball entry execution process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1207) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the blade member 401a is being opened in step S1201 will be described.
In step S1207, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1208.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1214.

First, processing (processing after step S1208) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S1208, the MPU 62 refers to the plate opening/closing execution completion flag stored in the RAM 64 to determine whether or not the plate 403a has been opened/closed. This plate opening/closing flag is a flag for specifying that the plate 403a has been opened/closed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state and before setting the blade member 401a to the closed state. The MPU 62 sets the plate opening/closing flag when opening/closing the plate 403a, and clears the plate opening/closing flag when the blade member 401a is set to the closed state.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the opening/closing of the plate 403a has been completed (when the plate opening/closing execution completion flag is set in the RAM 64), the variable ball entry execution process ends.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the opening/closing of the plate 403a has not been executed (if the plate opening/closing execution completion flag is not set in the RAM 64), the MPU 62 starts the timer counter T in step S1209. It is determined whether the value is "500" or less. In other words, in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. In the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "50" in step S1206, so in step S1209 it is determined that the value of the timer counter T is "500" or less. will do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the timer counter T is not "500" or less (in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, if 1 sec has not elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state, If determined), the variable ball entry execution process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the timer counter T is "500" or less (in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, 1 second after setting the blade member 401a to the open state). is determined to have passed), a plate opening process is executed in step S1210. In this plate opening process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate driving section 403c.

In step S1211, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "400" or less. In other words, in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 0.2 sec has elapsed after setting the plate 403a to the open state. In the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "50" in step S1206, so in step S1211 it is determined that the value of the timer counter T is "400" or less. will do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1211 that the value of the timer counter T is not "400" or less (in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, 0.2 sec has not elapsed since the plate 403a was set to the open state). If it is determined that ), the variable ball entry execution process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1211 that the value of the timer counter T is "400" or less (in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, after setting the plate 403a to the open state, the MPU 62 counts 0.00). If it is determined that 2 sec has elapsed), plate closing processing is executed in step S1212. In this plate closing process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate driving section 403c.

In step S1213, the MPU 62 sets the plate opening/closing execution completion flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the plate opening/closing execution completion flag provided in the various flag storage area 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the variable ball entry execution process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1214) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S1214, the MPU 62 executes blade member closing execution processing. In this blade member closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the closed state by executing drive control of the blade member driving section 401c.

In step S1215, the MPU 62 assigns 0 to the area indicating the plate opening/closing executed flag and the variable entry execution mode flag provided in the various flag storage area 64d of the RAM 64, so that the plate opening/closing executed flag and the variable entry Clear the sphere running mode flag. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the variable ball entry execution process.

Thus, in the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the open state, enables the game ball to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, and sets the plate 403a to the open or closed state. A game ball can enter either the right ball entrance 404 or the left ball entrance 405.

In addition, in the variable ball entry execution mode in the high-frequency support mode or special mode, the time (open period) from when the plate 403a is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again is the time when the blade member 401a is set to the open state. After that, it is shorter than the time (open period) until it is set to the closed state again. Specifically, the open period of the plate 403a (0.2 sec in this embodiment) is about 1/10 of the open period of the blade member 401a (2 sec in this embodiment). In other words, the game ball entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 enters the right ball entry hole 404 with a probability of about 1/10.

In the present embodiment, the plate 403a performs one opening/closing operation during the opening period of the blade member 401a, but may perform the opening/closing operation multiple times.
Further, in the present embodiment, the open period of the plate 403a is set to 0.2 sec and the open period of the blade member 401a is set to 2 sec, but other open periods may be adopted.
Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the open state when it is determined that 1 second has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. Timing other than this may be adopted as the timing to perform.

On the other hand, in the variable ball entry execution mode in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, the time (open period) from setting the blade member 401a to the open state to setting it to the closed state again is 0.2 sec. Therefore, the plate 403a opens and closes immediately after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. In other words, the game ball cannot enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 .

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S817 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the variable ball entry execution process of step S816, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 50g corresponding to the right ball entrance 404 detects the winning of the game ball in step S817. It is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (V prize) in the ball mouth 404.例文帳に追加

When the MPU 62 determines in step S817 that the game ball has entered the right ball entrance 404, in step S818, it executes V winning success processing. In this V winning success process, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the closed state by executing the drive control of the blade member driving section 401c, and then sets the plate opening/closing execution completion flag and the variable entry execution flag stored in the RAM 64. Clear the in-mode flag. Also, in the V winning success process, the MPU 62 sets a V winning success command. The MPU 62 transmits the V winning success command set in step S818 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S807 described above.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the game ball has entered the right ball entrance 404 based on the V winning success command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817 that the game ball has not won in the right ball entrance 404, in step S819 it determines whether or not the blade member 401a is set to the closed state. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the blade member 401a is not set to the closed state in step S819, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the blade member 401a is set to the closed state at step S819, at step S820, the V winning failure process is executed. In this V winning failure process, the MPU 62 sets a V winning failure command. The MPU 62 transmits the V winning failure command set in step S820 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the game ball did not win in the right ball entrance 404 based on the V winning failure command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode as it is when "big win" is won in the lottery, whereas when "small win" is won in the lottery, the variable When a ball is entered into the right ball entrance 404 in the variable ball entry execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.
In the variable ball execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 is operated when only a ball is entered into the left ball entrance 405, or when a ball is entered into both the right ball entrance 404 and the left ball entrance 405. If not, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered.

Here, as described above, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball wins the upper working opening 36 is higher than that of the lower working opening 37 . Further, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 36, the probability of winning a small win is 1/6.
However, in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, as described above, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, when it becomes "small winning", the game ball is placed on the right side A ball cannot be entered into the variable ball entry mechanism 40. - 特許庁
In addition, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, when it becomes "small winning", the game ball is the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 Since it is possible to enter a ball, the probability of shifting to the variable ball-entering execution mode when winning a prize in the upper operation port 36 and winning a big win is about 1/60.

<Variation end processing>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation end processing.
In the fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1309 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 stores information (main display unit 45, the information relating to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed) is specified. Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during variable display (variation end execution processing).

In step S1302, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1306.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step S1303, the game number counter set in step S1104 of the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode Subtract 1 from the RTC value and update it. Here, the variation command set in step S716 described above includes the value of the number-of-games counter RTC.
In step S1304, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number-of-games counter RTC is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1306.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that the number-of-games counter RTC is "0" or less, it clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1305. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

In this way, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 as a result of a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. After completion, transition to high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed.

After executing the process of step S1305, if it is determined in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, or if it is determined in step S1304 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 , In step S1306, it is determined whether or not the game mode is a special mode.
When the MPU 62 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S1306 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), it ends the fluctuation end processing without executing the processing after step S1307. .
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the game mode is the special mode at step S1306, at step S1307, the number of game counter RTC set at step S1108 of the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode Subtract 1 from the value and update. Here, the variation command set in step S716 described above includes the value of the number-of-games counter RTC.

In step S1308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number-of-games counter RTC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the fluctuation end processing without executing the processing after step S1309.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the number-of-games counter RTC is "0" or less, it clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1309. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation end processing.

In this way, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 as a result of a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the end of the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. After that, go to a special mode. The special mode continues until 30 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 functions as game state transition means for transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode.

In the present embodiment, in the normal mode and the high-frequency support mode of the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60, based on the internal lottery result (low-frequency support mode result or high-frequency support mode result), The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.
In addition, in this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but may have this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches to an opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The game state is shifted from the normal control state, and when the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode. can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is launched toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the entered game ball to be entered. Then, the main controller 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 . Here, the probability (approximately 1/12.5) of shifting to the open/close execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 is , based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode is higher than (approximately 1/60). there is According to this, since the player expects the game state to shift to the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Switch game mode. Specifically, when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode, the normal mode Shift the game mode to. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, so the pachinko machine 10 can You can improve the attention to.
In this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode, Although the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control device 60, after the game mode is shifted to the special mode, when a predetermined number of game times (30 times in this embodiment) are digested, the game mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. Transition. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game is completed, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game rounds is completed. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. As a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when the number of times of "small winning" exceeds a predetermined number of times, the game mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. You may make it move.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game ball is shot toward the right-handed route. In other words, the main controller 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when a game ball is shot toward the right-handed route during stay in the special mode. According to this, the player shoots the game ball toward the right-handed route in the high-frequency support mode, and shoots the game ball toward the left-handed route in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play comfortably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the game state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is a high-frequency It functions as a second lottery result that shifts the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode even when the low-frequency support mode results, increasing the chances of shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
Then, the low frequency support mode is a normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained. It has a special mode to transition to. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode. Specifically, in this embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.
In this embodiment, in the special mode, the probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode is 100%, which is higher than in the normal mode, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation opening 36 and the lower operation opening 37, the main controller 60 shifts from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is changed and the game state is changed from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is changed to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60, when the game state is shifted from the opening and closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing, for example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the completion of the game round.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 23, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. An input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23 , 53 to 55 , speaker unit 24 and display control device 100 .
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 53 to 55 and the speaker unit 24 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which, in addition to the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 105 . Specifically, MPU 102 controls VDP 105 by generating commands for VDP 105 .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 51 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 51 . The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 51 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 51 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2001 to S2005 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62 , it stores the command in the RAM 94 . Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62 , and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62 . The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines effects for the game round, effects for the variable entering execution mode, effects for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 53 to 55 and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S<b>2004 , the MPU 92 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the demonstration command received from the MPU 62 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 53 to 55 and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S2005, command transmission processing for transmitting commands set in the effect determination processing in step S2002 and the demonstration display execution processing in step S2004 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100 , and transmits various commands to the display control device 100 . , the command is transmitted to the display control device 100 .
After that, the MPU 92 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process for executing an effect for the game round, an effect for the variable entering execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2109 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has been received, in step S2102, based on the content of the type command, whether or not the win/loss result is "big win". judge.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the winning result is "big hit", the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2103.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the win/loss result is not "big hit winning", it executes the processes after step S2104.

First, in step S2102, the processing (processing after step S2103) when the MPU 92 determines that the winning result is "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S2103, the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process for big wins. In this jackpot symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number on the activated line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined, and it is determined that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result", the same even number is finally displayed as the stop result on the activated line L. , the information relating to the combination of symbols having the number of . The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Next, the processing (processing after step S2104) when the MPU 92 determines that the winning result is not "big hit winning" at step S2102 will be described.
In step S2104, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the winning result is "small winning" based on the content of the type command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the win/loss result is "small hit winning", in step S2105, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for a small win. In this small winning symbol determination process, when "small winning" is obtained in the winning lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the MPU 92 finally stops on the activated line L. Information relating to a special combination of symbols is determined as the stop result to be displayed. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3-4-1"). In the case of winning a "small hit" in the lottery performed based on the prize winning to the lower operation port 37, the MPU 92 has the same alphabet as the stop result that is finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Determine information relating to the combination of symbols.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the success/failure result is not a "small win" (if it determines that the success/failure result is a "normal deviation result"), in step S2106, the normal deviation Execute the symbol determination process for. In the pattern determination process for the normal deviation, the MPU 92 determines which of the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 has won a prize as a trigger to execute the variable display of the pattern based on the contents of the command for variation. (Which of the first result display portion 45a and the second result display portion 45b, the main display portion 45 to execute the variable display) is determined, and the ready-to-win display is generated based on the content of the variable command. determine whether or not to

The MPU 92 determines that the variable display of the pattern is to be executed with the winning of the upper working port 36 as a trigger. Determines information relating to the combination of symbols to be displayed. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 determines information related to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

In addition, the MPU 92 determines that the variation display of the pattern is to be executed by triggering the winning of the lower working port 37, and when it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs, the stop result is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. , the information relating to the combination of symbols for reach display is determined.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 determines information related to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines a combination of symbols that is different from both the combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display.

After executing the process of step S2103, step S2105, or step S2106, the MPU 92 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Here, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 92, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when it becomes "small winning", Before the variable display of the pattern display device 51 ends, the character is displayed on the display screen G, and a pre-notification performance is executed to notify the player to hit right with the words of the character. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes the advance notification effect five seconds before the end of the variable display of the symbol display device 51 . According to this, the player starts hitting to the right after confirming the advance notification effect, so that the game ball reaches the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 before the blade member 401a is set to the open state by the MPU 62. can be done. In other words, the game ball can reach the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 within 5 seconds after being shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 .

In this way, in the present embodiment, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when it becomes a "small winning" 2, the player can enter the game ball into the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 by starting right hitting after confirming the advance notification effect.
Here, as described above, in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the upper operation opening 36 than the lower operation opening 37, and in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball enters the upper operation opening 36 The probability of winning the lower operation opening 37 is higher than that. Then, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37, the probability (approximately 1/12.5) of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode is It is higher than the probability (about 1/60) of shifting to the open/close execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode functions as a first time-saving state in which the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is likely to enter the ball. The low-frequency support mode of the special mode functions as a second time-saving state in which the ball is less likely to enter the right variable ball-entering mechanism 40 compared to the high-frequency support mode. According to this, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, so that the pachinko machine can be diversified. 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, the MPU 92, as a result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning in the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when it becomes "small winning" is designed not to execute the advance notification effect.

In this way, in the present embodiment, in the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when it becomes "small winning" 2, since the player cannot confirm the advance notification effect, the game ball cannot be entered into the right variable ball entry mechanism 40.例文帳に追加In other words, in the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, the ball cannot be entered into the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 .

Also, in this embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the lower operation opening 37 than the upper operation opening 36, so in the high frequency support mode, the game ball toward the right-handed route By firing , it functions as a first time-saving state in which the situation is advantageous to the player. In the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the upper working port 36 than the lower working port 37, so the low-frequency support mode of the special mode allows the game ball to hit the right-handed route. By firing, it functions as a second time-saving state that puts the player in a disadvantageous situation compared to the high-frequency support mode. In other words, the low-frequency support mode of the special mode becomes an advantageous situation for the player by shooting the game ball toward the left-handed route. According to this, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, thereby diversifying the types of game states. 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first time saving state increases the probability of winning the lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36, and the second time saving state is the upper working port 36 than the lower working port 37 By increasing the probability of winning a prize, an advantageous situation and a disadvantageous situation are created for the player.
On the other hand, the first time saving state shortens the display duration of the variable display based on the winning to the lower working port 37, and the second time saving state is the fluctuation based on the winning to the lower working port 37 Advantages and disadvantages for the player may be created by lengthening the display duration of the display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

At step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined at step S2103, step S2105, or step S2106, and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected at step S2107. Then, the MPU 92 stores the stop result command and the pattern command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. These stop result command and pattern command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the game cycle on the symbol display device 51 based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the game round based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L. stop display.

After executing the process of step S2108, or when determining in step S2101 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a command for the variable ball entry execution mode (blade member open command, V winning success command, or V winning failure command) transmitted from the MPU 62 is received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the command for the variable entry execution mode has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2112.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the command for the variable entry execution mode has been received, in step S2110 the MPU 92 executes processing for determining the effect for the variable entry execution mode. In this variable entrance execution mode effect determination process, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the blade member open command has been received, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, A performance pattern corresponding to the opening of the blade member 401a is selected. Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the V winning success command has been received, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the success of the V winning by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93. If it is determined in step S2109 that the V winning failure command has been received, the rendering table pre-stored in the ROM 93 is referenced to select a rendering pattern corresponding to the V winning failure.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 sets a command for the variable entry execution mode including the effect for the variable entry execution mode selected in step S2110. Then, the MPU 92 stores commands for the variable entry execution mode in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. This command for the variable entry execution mode is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100, based on the command for the variable ball entry execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92, produces an effect for the variable ball entry execution mode (opening of the blade member 401a, success of V winning, or failure of V winning). ) is read out from the program ROM 103 for executing the effect corresponding to the symbol display device 51 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. Thereby, the symbol display device 51 executes the performance for the variable ball-entering execution mode, and informs the player that the blade member 401a has been released, that the V winning is successful, or that the V winning is unsuccessful.

After executing the process of step S2111, or when determining in step S2109 that the command for the variable entry execution mode has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2112 and subsequent steps.
In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2116.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, in step S2113 it determines the sort result type based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2114, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the sort result type determined in step S2113.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in order to determine the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204 as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the "high frequency support mode result".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202, it selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), In step S2203, based on the contents of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode is the special mode when "big hit" is won in the lottery.

When the game mode is determined to be the special mode in step S2203, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2202 and selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204, the opening and closing execution mode effect is produced. Choose B. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time required to open and close the big winning opening 38a 15 times in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effect A and the effect B.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2114. This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 51 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 51 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the processing of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S2116 onward.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62 . After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 27, has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has distribution results of "high-frequency support mode results" and "low-frequency support mode results" as game results other than the "non-normal result".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, contents such as the game state differ according to the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the "high-frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. . In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, in the "high-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B. . In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. Furthermore, in the "low-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the "special mode".

On the other hand, in the "special mode" game mode, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the game result based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Therefore, the player recognizes that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" or the "low-frequency support mode result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Regarding the entry of the game ball into the right variable entry mechanism and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an effect for a game round when a game ball enters the lower operation opening with the win to the through gate as a trigger in the high-frequency support mode.
In addition, the high-frequency support mode is a "big win" or "small win" in the lottery, and if it is distributed to the "high-frequency support mode result" in the distribution lottery, or during the stay in the special mode When the lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution lottery results in a "low frequency support mode result", the process shifts. Also, FIG. 28 is a view showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the winning result is "small winning".

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4B) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. , it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols. In addition, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the reference number of times for ending the high-frequency support mode (55 times in FIG. 28A), and displays the value on the symbol display device 51 based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops displaying part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4(B)) as shown in FIG. 28(A). In this state, the same combination of symbols (“A” in this embodiment) is displayed to suggest a stop result, and in this state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to display a ready-to-win display. Generate and move to reach period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. By stopping display on L, the result of the lottery is announced.

After the MPU 102 stops displaying the combination of symbols having the same alphabet on the activated line L, the MPU 62 controls the blade member driving section 401c as shown in FIG. The blade member 401a is set to the open state.
Further, the MPU 102 generates an effect for notifying the player of the opening of the blade member based on the blade member opening command received from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and informs the player to hit right by the character's words.

28D and 28E, the MPU 102 executes an effect for the variable entry execution mode based on the command for the variable entry execution mode received from the MPU 92 .
In the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 receives a V prize success command from the MPU 92 when the game ball enters the right ball entrance 404 (V prize) in the variable ball entry execution mode. As shown in FIG. 28(D), an effect corresponding to a successful V prize is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the character "V" on the entire surface of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and notifies the player that the game ball has won the right ball entrance 404 (V win). .
In addition, in the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, when the game ball does not enter the right ball entrance 404 (V prize), the MPU 102, based on the V prize failure command received from the MPU 92, performs FIG. As shown in E), an effect corresponding to the failure of winning the V prize is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the characters "Unfortunately" on the entire display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and informs the player that the game ball did not enter the right ball entrance 404 (V win). inform.

FIG. 29 is an enlarged view showing the periphery of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
After causing the MPU 102 to stop display the combination of symbols having the same alphabet on the effective line L, the MPU 62 drives and controls the blade member driving section 401c as shown in FIGS. 28(C) and 29(A). , the blade member 401a is set to the open state (see the arrow in the drawing).

When 1 second has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state, the MPU 62 controls the plate driving section 403c to open the plate 403a as shown in FIG. 29(B). After setting (see the arrow in the figure) and a predetermined time (0.2 sec in this embodiment), the plate 403a is set to the closed state (see the arrow in FIG. 29(C)).
Then, the MPU 62, when the game ball wins the right ball entrance 404 (V win), or when 2 seconds have passed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state, as shown in FIG. 29(C) , the blade member driving section 401c is controlled to set the blade member 401a to the closed state (see the arrow in the drawing).

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball wins (V wins) in the right ball entrance.
MPU 102 responds to successful V winning as shown in FIG. 28(D) and FIG. Execute the production to do. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, or determines that the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 30(B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 30(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 30(C)) up to the end reference number of times of the high-frequency support mode based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204, the effect B is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this production B, as shown in FIG. 30(D), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "You're in a 30-turn chance zone." !” informs the player that the game result is the “low-frequency support mode result” (transition to the special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 30(E). In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (30 times in FIG. 30(E)) up to the reference number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the command for variation. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an effect for a game cycle when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols. Further, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (15 times in FIG. 31(A)) up to the standard number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the variable command. displayed in the upper left corner of the Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby allowing combinations of the same symbols ( In this embodiment, "2") is displayed to indicate the stop result, and in that state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate the ready-to-win display and shift to the ready-to-win period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. By stopping display on L, the result of the lottery is announced. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, or determines that the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 31(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 31(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 completes 30 game rounds without "winning a jackpot" in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 31(D), it shifts to the normal mode.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby achieving the same combination of symbols. In this state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate a ready-to-win display and shift to a ready-to-win period.

After that, the MPU 102 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying a combination of symbols having the same number on the activated line L as the stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 . After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high-frequency support mode result", in step S2202, the MPU 92 selects effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 31(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 31(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204, the effect B is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect B, as shown in FIG. 31(E), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "You're in a 30-turn chance zone." !” informs the player that the game result is the “low-frequency support mode result” (transition to the special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (30 times in FIG. 31(E)) up to the standard number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the command for variation. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) In the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode based on the result of the internal lottery, In the special mode of the low-frequency support mode, the game state shifts to the high-frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. You will play with the expectation that you will stay. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(2) When the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the main controller 60 shifts the game state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. When moving to the frequency support mode, attention is paid to whether or not the player is staying in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(3) Low-frequency support mode has a higher probability of hitting the upper working hole 37 than lower working hole 37, and high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of hitting the lower working hole 37 than the upper working hole 36. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the upper working port 36 in the low frequency support mode, and shoots the game ball aiming at the lower working port 37 in the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can clearly suggest the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode to the player.

(4) Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37, the probability of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is determined when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36. Based on the result of the internal lottery, the probability of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is higher than that, so the player expects to shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(5) The main controller 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(6) After shifting the game mode to the special mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds have been completed. Pay attention to the number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(7) The results of the internal lottery are the low-frequency support mode result that shifts the game state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result that shifts the game state to the high-frequency support mode. , the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result is the low-frequency support mode, and provides an opportunity to shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode. can be increased. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(8) The low frequency support mode is a normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained. , the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(9) The low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode, and the main controller 60 changes the game state to the low-frequency support mode. When the game mode is shifted, the game mode is shifted to the special mode, and when the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, so that the player can shift the game state to the low-frequency support mode. Even if it does, the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(10) The game state is a high frequency support mode in which the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is easy to enter, and a special mode in which the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is difficult to enter compared to the high frequency support mode. Since the support mode is provided, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(11) The game state includes a high-frequency support mode in which the player is in an advantageous situation by shooting game balls toward the right-handed route, and a high-frequency support mode by shooting game balls toward the right-handed route Since it has a low frequency support mode of a special mode which is a disadvantageous situation for the player compared to the frequency support mode, when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, the normal control state is changed to the opening and closing execution mode. It is possible to diversify the types of game states that can be shifted to the game state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 as a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. ), it transitioned to a special mode. Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the allocation result is not the "high-frequency support mode result" in step S1101 and then determines that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (game mode is the normal mode), a special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1107. In other words, in the first embodiment, the MPU 62 always transitions to the special mode when transitioning to the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 shifts to the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 62 executes a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the special mode, and wins the lottery. , it differs from the first embodiment in that it shifts to a special mode.

In this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1113A as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), The process after step S1105 is executed.
First, the processing (processing after step S1102) when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" in step S1101 will be described.

At step S1102, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in RAM 64 is cleared.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes with different support modes to be shifted to after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal mode in which the support mode is set after the end of the opening and closing execution mode according to the distribution result of the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result", and the "low frequency support Mode Result” and “High Frequency Support Mode Result” have a special mode as a game mode in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution result.

The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which game mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, the game mode is set to the normal mode.

At step S1104, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "100". After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1105) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" will be described.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), in step S1105, It is determined whether a special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 or not.

When the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (when it determines that the game mode is the special mode), it executes the processing after step S1102 described above. In other words, when the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 switches the support mode to high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, regardless of the result of distributing the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result." Set to support mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S1106, it is stored in the RAM 64. clear the high-frequency support flag. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

In step S1109A, the MPU 62 executes special mode lottery processing. Specifically, in the special mode lottery process, the MPU 62 performs a lottery with a predetermined probability (1/8 in this embodiment) to determine whether or not to shift to the special mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the probability of shifting to the special mode to 1/8, but it may be larger than 1/8 or smaller than 1/8. In addition, for example, when the number of games played until the "big win" is achieved in the lottery lottery is smaller than a predetermined number of times, the MPU 62 reduces the probability of shifting to the special mode, and If the number of times the game is played until winning is greater than a predetermined number of times, the probability of shifting to the special mode may be increased, and the probability of shifting to the special mode may be increased according to other game conditions. You can change it.

In step S1110A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the lottery for the special mode has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has been won, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1107.

At step S1107, the MPU 62 sets a special mode flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the special mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.
At step S1108, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "30".
At step S1111A, the MPU 62 sets a special mode command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends. This special mode command includes information for making the sound emission control device 90 recognize that the game mode is set to the special mode. MPU 62 transmits the special mode command set in step S1111A to sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the special mode based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until 30 games, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when 30 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In addition, after executing the process of step S1108, the MPU 62 clears the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37 .

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery was not won, it executes the processing from step S1112A.
At step S1112A, the MPU 62 clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In step S1113A, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "0". After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In this way, when a win occurs in the winning lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "high frequency support mode result", the game state is the open/close execution mode regardless of the current game state. After completion, transition to high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without winning in the winning lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

Also, if a hit occurs in the winning lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is "low frequency support mode result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode if the game mode is a special mode. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode, and if the game mode is the normal mode, it shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without winning in the winning lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low-frequency support mode continues at least until a win occurs in the winning lottery. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode is a special mode with a probability of 1/8 and a normal mode with a probability of 7/8. When the game mode becomes the special mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, when no win occurs in the lottery, that is, when the result of the lottery is "normal result", the game state does not shift.

Here, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is included in the variation command described above. In addition, information relating to the game mode (information relating to whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the aforementioned opening command.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 functions as game state transition means for transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode.

In the present embodiment, in the normal mode and the high-frequency support mode of the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60, based on the internal lottery result (low-frequency support mode result or high-frequency support mode result), The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In addition, in this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but may have this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches to an opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The game state is shifted from the normal control state, and when the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode. can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 shoots toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the entered game ball to be entered. Then, the main controller 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 . Here, the probability (approximately 1/12.5) of shifting to the open/close execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 is , based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode is higher than (approximately 1/60). there is According to this, since the player expects the game state to shift to the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Switch game mode. Specifically, when shifting the game state to the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode or the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode , Shift the game mode to the normal mode. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, so the pachinko machine 10 can You can improve the attention to.
In this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode or the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode. , the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, but based on conditions other than this, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control device 60, after the game mode is shifted to the special mode, when a predetermined number of game times (30 times in this embodiment) are digested, the game mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. Transition. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game is completed, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game rounds is completed. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. As a result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when the number of times of "small winning" exceeds a predetermined number of times, the game mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. You may make it move.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game ball is shot toward the right-handed route. In other words, the main controller 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when a game ball is shot toward the right-handed route during stay in the special mode. According to this, the player shoots the game ball toward the right-handed route in the high-frequency support mode, and shoots the game ball toward the left-handed route in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play comfortably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the game state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is a high-frequency It functions as a second lottery result that shifts the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode even when the low-frequency support mode results, increasing the chances of shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
Then, the low frequency support mode is a normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained. It has a special mode to transition to. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.
In this embodiment, in the special mode, the probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 100%, which is higher than in the normal mode, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, the main controller 60 shifts from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is shifted and the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In this embodiment, the main control device 60, when the game state is shifted from the opening and closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing, for example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the completion of the game round.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode functions as special mode lottery means for executing a special mode lottery to determine whether to transition the game mode to the special mode. Then, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. According to this, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. will focus on the results of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
In the present embodiment, the special mode lottery is executed in the special mode lottery process of step S1109A in the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A special mode lottery may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process for executing an effect for the game round, an effect for the variable entering execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes after step S2112.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2117A.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, in step S2113 it determines the sort result type based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2114A, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the sort result type determined in step S2113.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in order to determine the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204A as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the "high frequency support mode result".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202, it selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), In step S2203, based on the contents of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode is the special mode when "big hit" is won in the lottery.

When the game mode is determined to be the special mode in step S2203, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2202 and selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, the opening and closing execution mode effect is produced. Select B1. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
It should be noted that the duration of the effect A and the effect B1 corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effect A and the effect B1.

Here, the effect B1 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 causes a character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's line "You're in a 30-turn chance zone." !” informs the player that the game result is the “low-frequency support mode result” (shift to the special mode) (see FIGS. 30(D) and 31(E)).
On the other hand, in the effect B1 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the lines of the character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is different from the production B of the first embodiment in that it does not notify that the transition to .

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2114A. This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 51 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 51 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the processing of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S2117A onward.

In step S2117A, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a special mode command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117A that the special mode command has been received, in step S2118A the MPU 92 executes special mode notification processing based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for notifying the player of the transition to the special mode based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player that the special mode will be entered. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Notify the transition to the mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2117A that the special mode command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62 . After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 35, has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has distribution results of "high-frequency support mode results" and "low-frequency support mode results" as game results excluding "normal outlier results".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, contents such as the game state differ according to the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times. In addition, in the "high-frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. . In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, in the "high-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times. In addition, in the "low-frequency support mode result" based on winning the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B1. . In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B1. Furthermore, in the "low-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the "special mode" with a probability of 1/8 and the "normal mode" with a probability of 7/8.

On the other hand, in the "special mode" game mode, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the game result based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Therefore, the player recognizes that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" or the "low-frequency support mode result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Regarding the flow after the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball wins (V wins) in the right ball entrance.
MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to a successful V winning as shown in FIG.
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, or determines that the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 36(B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 36(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 36(C)) to the end reference number of times of the high-frequency support mode based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, the effect B1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has been won, it sets a special mode command in step S1111A. If so, in step S2118A, special mode notification processing is executed based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, as shown in FIG. 36(D). The player is notified of the transition to the special mode with "It's a chance zone for 30 spins!".

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery was not won, the MPU 102 does not set the special mode command. The character and the lines of this character are not displayed on the screen G, and the player is not notified of the transition to the special mode (not shown).
In this embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the lines of the character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and notifies the player that the mode will shift to the special mode. By not doing so, it was notified that the lottery for the special mode was not won. On the other hand, the MPU 102 displays the character and the lines of the character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and camouflages the player as if he or she won the special mode lottery. good too. According to this, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction as to whether or not the special mode lottery will be won.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 36(E). In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode is a special mode with a probability of 1/8 and a normal mode with a probability of 7/8. When the game mode becomes the special mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (30 times in FIG. 36(E)) up to the standard number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the command for variation. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In this embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an effect for a game cycle when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols. Further, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (15 times in FIG. 37A) up to the standard number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the command for variation. displayed in the upper left corner of the Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In this embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby allowing combinations of the same symbols ( In this embodiment, "2") is displayed to indicate the stop result, and in that state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate the ready-to-win display and shift to the ready-to-win period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. By stopping display on L, the result of the lottery is announced. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, or determines that the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 37(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 37(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

Further, when the pachinko machine 10 completes 30 game rounds without "winning a jackpot" in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 37(D), it shifts to the normal mode.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby achieving the same combination of symbols. In this state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate a ready-to-win display and shift to a ready-to-win period.

After that, the MPU 102 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying a combination of symbols having the same number on the activated line L as the stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 . After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high-frequency support mode result", in step S2202, the MPU 92 selects effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 37(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 37(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, the effect B1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has been won, it sets a special mode command in step S1111A. If so, in step S2118A, special mode notification processing is executed based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command sent from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 after the opening/closing execution mode is completed, and the character's line "It's a 30-turn chance zone!" to notify the player of the shift to the special mode (see FIG. 36(D)). Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the lottery for the special mode has not been won, the MPU 102 does not set the special mode command. At the end of the mode, the character and the lines of the character are not displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and the player is not notified of the transition to the special mode.
In this embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the lines of the character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and notifies the player that the mode will shift to the special mode. By not doing so, it was notified that the lottery for the special mode was not won. On the other hand, the MPU 102 displays the character and the lines of the character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and camouflages the player as if he or she won the special mode lottery. good too. According to this, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction as to whether or not the special mode lottery will be won.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode is a special mode with a probability of 1/8 and a normal mode with a probability of 7/8. When the game mode becomes the special mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the special mode, based on the content of the variation command. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In this embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to this embodiment, the same functions and effects as (1) to (4), (5) to (8), (10), and (11) in the first embodiment can be obtained. In addition, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(12) The main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Attention will be paid to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 as a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. ), it transitioned to a special mode. When the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, this special mode continues until 30 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after shifting to the special mode, the MPU 62 executes a lottery as to whether or not to continue the special mode each time the game cycle is completed. differs from the first embodiment in that it shifts to the normal mode.

In this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, transition processing and variation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are different from those in the first embodiment. The contents of transition processing and variation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1107 as shown in FIG. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 62 terminates the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends without executing the process of step S1108 after executing the process of step S1107.

<Variation end processing>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation ending process.
In the fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1310B as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 executes the processes of steps S1301 to S1305 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes of step S1306 and after.

After executing the process of step S1305, if it is determined in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, or if it is determined in step S1304 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 , In step S1306, it is determined whether or not the game mode is a special mode.
When the MPU 62 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S1306 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), it ends the fluctuation end processing without executing the processing after step S1307B. .
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the game mode is the special mode at step S1306, at step S1307B, the special mode continuation lottery process is executed. Specifically, in the special mode continuation lottery process, the MPU 62 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to continue the special mode with a predetermined probability (29/30 in this embodiment) after the end of the game cycle.

In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the probability of continuing the special mode to 29/30 (the probability of shifting to the normal mode to 1/30), but it may be greater than 29/30 or less than 29/30. may In addition, for example, when the number of games played until the "big win" is achieved in the lottery lottery is smaller than a predetermined number of times, the MPU 62 reduces the probability of continuing the special mode and If the number of times the game is played until the game is won is greater than a predetermined number of times, the probability of continuing the special mode may be increased, and the probability of continuing the special mode may be increased according to other game conditions. You can change it.

In step S1308B, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the continuation lottery for the special mode has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the continuation lottery for the special mode has been won, it ends the fluctuation end processing without executing the processing after step S1309.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the special mode continuation lottery was not won, in step S1309 the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In step S1310B, MPU 62 sets a normal mode command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation end processing. This normal mode command includes information for making the sound emission control device 90 recognize that the game mode is set to the normal mode. MPU 62 transmits the normal mode command set in step S1310B to sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the normal mode based on the normal mode command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

In this way, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 as a result of a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the end of the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. After that, go to a special mode. The special mode is continued if winning the continuation lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 functions as game state transition means for transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode.

In the present embodiment, in the normal mode and the high-frequency support mode of the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60, based on the internal lottery result (low-frequency support mode result or high-frequency support mode result), The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.
In addition, in this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but may have this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches to an opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The game state is shifted from the normal control state, and when the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode. can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 shoots toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the entered game ball to be entered. Then, the main controller 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 . Here, the probability (approximately 1/12.5) of shifting to the open/close execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 is , based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode is higher than (approximately 1/60). there is According to this, since the player expects the game state to shift to the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Switch game mode. Specifically, when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode, the normal mode Shift the game mode to. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, so the pachinko machine 10 can You can improve the attention to.
In this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode, Although the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation end processing is a normal mode lottery means for executing a normal mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the main controller 60. function as Then, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when winning the normal mode lottery. According to this, when the main controller 60 wins the normal mode lottery, the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In this embodiment, the main controller 60, after shifting the game mode to the special mode, when the normal mode lottery is not won in which the probability of continuing the special mode is set to 29/30, from the special mode to the normal Although the game mode is shifted to the mode, for example, the probability of continuing the special mode may be set by dividing it into a plurality of probabilities such as 29/30 and 28/30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the game state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is a high-frequency support mode. It functions as a second lottery result that shifts the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result is the low-frequency support mode, increasing the chances of shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
Then, the low frequency support mode is a normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained. It has a special mode to transition to. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.
In this embodiment, in the special mode, the probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 100%, which is higher than in the normal mode, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, the main controller 60 shifts from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is shifted and the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In this embodiment, the main control device 60, when the game state is shifted from the opening and closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing, for example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the completion of the game round.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process for executing an effect for the game round, an effect for the variable entering execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes after step S2112.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2119B.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, in step S2113 it determines the sort result type based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2114B, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the sort result type determined in step S2113.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in order to determine the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204B as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the "high frequency support mode result".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202, it selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), In step S2203, based on the contents of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode is the special mode when "big hit" is won in the lottery.

When the game mode is determined to be the special mode in step S2203, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2202 and selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, the opening and closing execution mode effect is produced. Select B2. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effect A and the effect B2 corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effect A and the effect B2.

Here, the effect B2 of this embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 causes a character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's line "You're in a 30-turn chance zone." !” informs the player that the game result is the “low-frequency support mode result” (shift to the special mode) (see FIGS. 30(D) and 31(E)).
On the other hand, in the effect B2 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "Enter the chance zone!" This is different from the effect B of the first embodiment in that the player is notified that the game result is the "low frequency support mode result" (shift to the special mode).

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2114B. This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 51 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 51 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the processing of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2119B and subsequent steps.

In step S2119B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a normal mode command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2119B that the normal mode command has been received, in step S2120B it executes normal mode notification processing based on the contents of the normal mode command. In this normal mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a normal mode notification command. This normal mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

Based on the normal mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for notifying the player of the shift to the normal mode. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player that the mode will be changed to the normal mode. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and informs the player that the game will shift to the normal mode with the character's line "chance zone finished".

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2119B that the normal mode command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62 . After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 42, has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has distribution results of "high-frequency support mode results" and "low-frequency support mode results" as game results excluding "normal outlier results".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, contents such as the game state differ according to the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times. In addition, in the "high-frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. . In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, in the "high-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times. In addition, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B2. . In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B2. Furthermore, in the "low-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the "special mode".

On the other hand, in the "special mode" game mode, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the game result based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Therefore, the player recognizes that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" or the "low-frequency support mode result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Regarding the flow after the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism>
FIG. 43 shows an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball wins (V wins) in the right ball entrance.
MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to a successful V winning as shown in FIG.
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high-frequency support mode result", in step S2202, the MPU 92 selects effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 43(B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 43(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 43(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, the effect B2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect B2, as shown in FIG. 43(D), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and also displays the character's line "Enter the chance zone!" , the player is notified that the game result is the "low frequency support mode result" (transition to the special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 43(E). In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode continues the special mode if winning the continuation lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B, and shifts to the normal mode if not winning.
Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an effect for a game cycle when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby allowing combinations of the same symbols ( In this embodiment, "2") is displayed to indicate the stop result, and in that state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate the ready-to-win display and shift to the ready-to-win period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. By stopping display on L, the result of the lottery is announced. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, or determines that the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 44(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 44(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode unless winning the continuation lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the continuation lottery for the special mode has not been won, it sets a normal mode command in step S1310B, and the MPU 92 receives the normal mode command in step S2119B. If so, in step S2120B, normal mode notification processing is executed based on the content of the normal mode command. In this normal mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a normal mode notification command. This normal mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

Based on the normal mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 as shown in FIG. to notify the player of the shift to the normal mode.
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode as shown in FIG. 44(E).

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the continuation lottery for the special mode has been won, the MPU 102 does not set the normal mode command. The dialogue of this character is not displayed, and the player is not notified of the transition to the normal mode. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby achieving the same combination of symbols. In this state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate a ready-to-win display and shift to a ready-to-win period.

After that, the MPU 102 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying a combination of symbols having the same number on the activated line L as the stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 . After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high-frequency support mode result", in step S2202, the MPU 92 selects effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 44(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the character's line "Rush into RUSH!" to inform the player that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 44(C)) until the end standard number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, the effect B2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect B2, as shown in FIG. 44(F), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and also displays the character's line "Enter the chance zone!" , the player is notified that the game result is the "low frequency support mode result" (transition to the special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode continues the special mode if winning the continuation lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B, and shifts to the normal mode if not winning. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same actions and effects as (1) to (5) and (7) to (11) in the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained. can play.
(13) Since the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when winning the normal mode lottery, the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 as a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. ), it transitioned to a special mode. When the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, this special mode continues until 30 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode is set to 30 or 50 games, which is the end standard number of times set in the game number counter RTC. It differs from the first embodiment in that it continues until digestion.

In this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1110C as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), The process after step S1105 is executed.
First, the processing (processing after step S1102) when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" in step S1101 will be described.

At step S1102, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in RAM 64 is cleared.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes with different support modes to be shifted to after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal mode in which the support mode is set after the end of the opening and closing execution mode according to the distribution result of the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result", and the "low frequency support Mode Result” and “High Frequency Support Mode Result” have a special mode as a game mode in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution result.

The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which game mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, the game mode is set to the normal mode.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, processing (processing after step S1105) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high-frequency support mode result" will be described.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), in step S1105, It is determined whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (when it determines that the game mode is the special mode), it executes the processing after step S1102 described above. In other words, when the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 switches the support mode to high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, regardless of the result of distributing the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result." Set to support mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1105 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S1109C, the game number counter is set. Execute the process. This game number counter setting process will be described later in detail.

At step S1106, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
At step S1107, the MPU 62 sets a special mode flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the special mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.

In step S1110C, MPU 62 sets a special mode command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends. This special mode command includes information for making the sound emission control device 90 recognize that the game mode is set to the special mode. MPU 62 transmits the special mode command set in step S1110C to sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the special mode based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the number-of-games counter setting process.
In the number-of-games counter setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1401 to S1404 as shown in FIG.
In step S<b>1401 , the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 . In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the support mode when "big winning" or "small winning" is achieved in the lottery is the high-frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1401 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, in step S1402 it determines whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is "90" or more. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery is "small hit winning" before completing 10 game rounds after shifting to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is "90" or more, it sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "50" in step S1403. ” is set. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode in step S1401 (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), or if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 When it is determined that the value of RTC is not "90" or more, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "30" in step S1404. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode is continued until 30 or 50 games, which are the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when 30 or 50 game rounds have been completed. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
Here, information about the number of times the special mode continues (30 times or 50 times) is included in the special mode command described above.
In addition, after executing the processing of step S1107, the MPU 62 clears the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37.

In this way, when a win occurs in the winning lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "high frequency support mode result", the game state is the open/close execution mode regardless of the current game state. After completion, transition to high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without winning in the winning lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

Also, if a hit occurs in the winning lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is "low frequency support mode result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode if the game mode is a special mode. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode, and if the game mode is the normal mode, it shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without winning in the winning lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low-frequency support mode continues at least until a win occurs in the winning lottery. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 or 50 game times are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, when no win occurs in the lottery, that is, when the result of the lottery is "normal result", the game state does not shift.

Here, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is included in the variation command and the special mode command described above. In addition, information relating to the game mode (information relating to whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the aforementioned opening command.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 functions as game state transition means for transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode.

In the present embodiment, in the normal mode and the high-frequency support mode of the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60, based on the internal lottery result (low-frequency support mode result or high-frequency support mode result), The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.
In addition, in this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but may have this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches to an opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The game state is shifted from the normal control state, and when the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode. can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 shoots toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the entered game ball to be entered. Then, the main controller 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 . Here, the probability (approximately 1/12.5) of shifting to the open/close execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 is , based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode via the variable ball entry execution mode is higher than (approximately 1/60). there is According to this, since the player expects the game state to shift to the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Switch game mode. Specifically, when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode, the normal mode Shift the game mode to. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, so the pachinko machine 10 can You can improve the attention to.
In this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode, Although the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the game mode is shifted to the special mode, the main control device 60 switches from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times (30 times or 50 times in this embodiment) are completed. Switch game mode. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game is completed, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 or 50 game rounds have been completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. Alternatively, the game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game rounds other than this is completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 or 50 game rounds have been completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. For example, as a result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, when the number of times of "small winning" exceeds a predetermined number of times, the special mode is changed to the normal mode. You may make it transfer a game mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 or 50 game rounds have been completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. For example, the game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game ball is shot toward the right-handed route. In other words, the main controller 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when a game ball is shot toward the right-handed route during stay in the special mode. According to this, the player shoots the game ball toward the right-handed route in the high-frequency support mode, and shoots the game ball toward the left-handed route in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play comfortably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the game state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is a high-frequency support mode. It functions as a second lottery result that shifts the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result is the low-frequency support mode, increasing the chances of shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
Then, the low frequency support mode is a normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is obtained. It has a special mode to transition to. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode. Specifically, in this embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. attention to the game can be improved.
In this embodiment, in the special mode, the probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode is 100%, which is higher than in the normal mode, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of transitioning to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation opening 36 and the lower operation opening 37, the main controller 60 shifts from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is changed and the game state is changed from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is changed to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60, when the game state is shifted from the opening and closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing, for example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the completion of the game round.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 controls the number of times the game rounds are completed and the end reference number of times (this embodiment Based on the result of comparison with a threshold value set to a smaller number of times (90 times in this embodiment) than 100 times in the present embodiment), a special mode of 50 times (advantageous side game situation) advantageous to the player and an advantageous side They are sorted into 30 special modes (disadvantageous side game situations) that are more disadvantageous to the player than the game situation. According to this, the player pays attention to the number of times the game is played until the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode after the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.
In this embodiment, the advantageous side game situation is a special mode of 50 times, and the disadvantage side game situation is a special mode of 30 times. , an advantageous game situation and a disadvantageous game situation may be set.
In short, the advantageous game situation should be a game situation that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantageous game situation should be a game situation that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 reduces the number of times of completion of the game rounds until the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode after the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode to a number smaller than the end reference number of times. If it is smaller than the set threshold, it is sorted to the advantageous side game situation, and if it is larger than it, it is sorted to the disadvantaged side game situation. According to this, after the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to the game times up to the threshold set to the number of times smaller than the end reference number of times, so the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.
In this embodiment, after the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the game cycle is completed until the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode, and the threshold value set to the number of times smaller than the end reference number of times If it is smaller than this threshold, it is sorted to the advantageous side game situation, and if it is larger than this threshold, it is sorted to the unfavorable side game situation. In addition, it may be distributed to the disadvantageous side game situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special mode is an advantageous side game situation in which the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when 50 times (predetermined number of times) of the game are completed, and 30 times (less than the predetermined number of times). number of times), the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode. According to this, in the special mode of 30 times, the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times less than 50 is completed. It can be a disadvantageous gaming situation for Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10, as in the third embodiment, after shifting the game mode to the special mode by the main control device 60, the normal mode of whether to shift the game mode to the normal mode A normal mode lottery means for executing a mode lottery is provided, and the main controller 60 may shift the game mode to the normal mode when winning the normal mode lottery. In this case, the special mode may have an advantageous gaming situation with a low probability of winning the normal mode lottery and a disadvantageous gaming situation with a high probability of winning the normal mode lottery.
According to this, when the main controller 60 wins the normal mode lottery, the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Also, since the probability of winning the normal mode lottery is high in the disadvantageous game situation, the game situation can be made disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous game situation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process for executing an effect for the game round, an effect for the variable entering execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 47, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes after step S2112.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2117C.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, in step S2113 it determines the sort result type based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2114C, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the sort result type determined in step S2113.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in order to determine the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204C as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the "high frequency support mode result".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202C, it selects the effect A3 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), In step S2203, based on the contents of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode is the special mode when "big hit" is won in the lottery.

When the game mode is determined to be the special mode in step S2203, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2202C described above, and selects the effect A3 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203 (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204C, the opening and closing execution mode effect is produced. Select B3. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A3 and B3 corresponds to the time required to open and close the big winning opening 38a 15 times in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effect A3 and the effect B3.

Here, the effect A3 of this embodiment is different from the effect A of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect A of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's line "Rush into the RUSH!" 30(B) and FIG. 31(C).
On the other hand, in the effect A3 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's line "RUSH! If you win, you'll get a bonus!" to inform the player that the game result is a "high-frequency support mode result" (shift to normal mode), and if a win is made within 10 spins, The subsequent special mode is different from the effect A of the first embodiment in that it informs that the game continues until 50 game rounds are completed.

Also, the effect B3 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 causes a character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's line "You're in a 30-turn chance zone." !” informs the player that the game result is the “low-frequency support mode result” (shift to the special mode) (see FIGS. 30(D) and 31(E)).
On the other hand, in the effect B3 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the lines of the character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. This is different from the production B of the first embodiment in that it does not notify that the transition to .

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2114C. This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 51 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 51 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the processing of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S2117C onward.

In step S2117C, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a special mode command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that the special mode command has been received, in step S2118C, the MPU 92 executes special mode notification processing based on the contents of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above. Here, the special mode command includes the value of the number-of-games counter RTC.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for notifying the player of the transition to the special mode based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player that the special mode will be entered. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the character's line "30 turns. The player is notified of the shift to the special mode with "Chance Zone!" or "Chance Zone for 50 Spins!".

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that the special mode command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62 . After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure results" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 49, has game modes of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has distribution results of "high-frequency support mode results" and "low-frequency support mode results" as game results excluding "normal outlier results".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, contents such as the game state differ according to the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the "high-frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A3. . In the "high-frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower opening 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A3. Furthermore, in the "high-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times. In addition, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B3. . In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning to the lower operation port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabet, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B3. Furthermore, in the "low-frequency support mode result", the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the "special mode".

On the other hand, in the "special mode" game mode, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the game result based on the winning to the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A3. Furthermore, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode is the normal mode.

Therefore, the player recognizes that the distribution result is the "high-frequency support mode result" or the "low-frequency support mode result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Regarding the flow after the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball wins (V wins) in the right ball entrance.
MPU 102 responds to successful V winning, as shown in FIGS. Execute the production to do. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high-frequency support mode result", in step S2202C, effect A3 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. In this production A3, as shown in FIG. 50(B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's line "RUSH! If you win within 10 spins, you'll get a bonus!" to inform the player that the game result is a "high frequency support mode result" (shift to normal mode), and if the player wins within 10 spins. For example, it informs that the subsequent special mode will continue until 50 game rounds are completed.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 50(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 50(C)) to the end reference number of times of the high-frequency support mode based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204C, the effect B3 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is not equal to or greater than "90" (see FIG. 28A), in step S1404, the "30" is set to the value of the number-of-games counter RTC, and a special mode command is set in step S1110C. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that the special mode command has been received, in step S2118C, the MPU 92 executes special mode notification processing based on the contents of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, as shown in FIG. 50(D). The player is notified of the transition to the special mode by saying "It's a 30-turn chance zone!"

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 50(E). In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (30 times in FIG. 50(E)) up to the standard number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the command for variation. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In this embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

<Regarding the entry of the game ball into the right variable entry mechanism and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an effect for a game cycle when a game ball enters the lower operation opening triggered by winning the through gate in the high-frequency support mode.
In addition, the high-frequency support mode is a "jackpot winning" or "small winning" in the lottery, and if it is distributed to the "high-frequency support mode result" in the distribution lottery, or during the stay in the special mode When the lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution lottery results in a "low-frequency support mode result". Also, FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the winning result is "small winning".

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4B) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. , it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols. Further, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the reference number of times for ending the high-frequency support mode (95 times in FIG. 51(A)) on the symbol display device 51 based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has passed, the MPU 102 stops displaying part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4(B)) as shown in FIG. 51(A). In this state, the same combination of symbols (for example, "A") is displayed to suggest a stop result, and in this state, the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) is variably displayed to generate a ready-to-win display. Transition to reach period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same alphabet (for example, "AAA") on the activated line L as a stop result, thereby obtaining the result of the lottery. (see FIG. 28(B)).

After the MPU 102 stops displaying a combination of symbols having the same alphabet on the effective line L, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the open state by executing drive control of the blade member driving section 401c ( See FIG. 28(C)).
Further, the MPU 102 generates an effect for notifying the player of the opening of the blade member based on the blade member opening command received from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and informs the player to hit right by the character's words.

Then, the MPU 102 executes an effect for the variable entrance execution mode based on the command for the variable entrance execution mode received from the MPU 92 .
In the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 receives a V prize success command from the MPU 92 when the game ball enters the right ball entrance 404 (V prize) in the variable ball entry execution mode. A performance corresponding to the success of the V prize is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the character "V" on the entire surface of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and notifies the player that the game ball has won the right ball entrance 404 (V win). (See FIG. 28(D)).
In addition, in the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, when the game ball does not enter the right ball entrance 404 (V prize), the MPU 102, based on the V prize failure command received from the MPU 92, determines the V prize. Execute the production corresponding to the failure. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the characters "Unfortunately" on the entire surface of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and informs the player that the game ball did not enter the right ball entrance 404 (V win). Notify (see FIG. 28(E)).

The MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to the success of the V winning when the game ball wins the right ball entrance 404 (V winning) in the variable ball winning execution mode. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high-frequency support mode result", in step S2202C, effect A3 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. In this effect A3, as shown in FIG. 51(B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the line of this character "RUSH! If you win within 10 spins, you will get a bonus." , the subsequent special mode is notified to continue until 50 game rounds are completed.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 51(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the number-of-games counter RTC as the remaining number of times (100 times in FIG. 51(C)) until the end reference number of times of the high-frequency support mode, based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51 . Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If so (if it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204C, the effect B3 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is equal to or greater than "90" (see FIG. 51A), in step S1404, various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 are provided with The value of the number-of-games counter RTC is set to "50", and a special mode command is set in step S1110C. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that the special mode command has been received, in step S2118C, the MPU 92 executes special mode notification processing based on the contents of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, as shown in FIG. 51(D). The player is notified of the transition to the special mode by saying "It's a chance zone for 50 spins!"

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 51(E). In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 50 game rounds are completed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC to the remaining number of times (50 times in FIG. 51(E)) up to the standard number of times to end the special mode, based on the content of the command for variation. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 to suggest the player to hit left.
In this embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the reference number of times to end the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same actions and effects as (1) to (5) and (7) to (11) in the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained. can play.
(14) After shifting the game mode to the special mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 or 50 game rounds are completed. Pay attention to the number of times of digestion. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(15) The main controller 60 sets the number of times smaller than the end reference number of times after the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode until the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode. Based on the result of comparison with the threshold value, the player is divided into 50 special modes that are advantageous to the player and 30 special modes that are more disadvantageous to the player than the 50 special modes. After the game state is shifted to the support mode, attention is paid to the number of times the game cycle is completed until the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(16) The main controller 60 is set to a number smaller than the end reference number of times and the number of game rounds completed until the game state is switched to the opening/closing execution mode after the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode. is compared with a threshold value, and if it is smaller than this threshold value, it is sorted into a special mode of 50 times, so the player, after shifting the game state to the high-frequency support mode, is set to a number smaller than the end reference number of times. Attention will be paid to the number of game rounds up to the threshold. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(17) The 30-time special mode is disadvantageous to the player compared to the 50-time special mode because the game mode shifts from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times less than 50 is completed. It can be a game situation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

[Modification of each embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes modifications, improvements, etc. within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning hole 38a once per round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the big winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or the game to the big winning opening 38a When the total winning number of balls reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the door 38b is closed again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may vary according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the open/close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is the predetermined upper limit number. As a result, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers according to the distribution results. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger port for setting the opening/closing door 38b to a closed state when a game ball enters the game ball, and when a predetermined time elapses, this end trigger port is provided. It may be configured to allow the ball to enter the trigger hole.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, and the opening/closing door 38b is closed again. was set to On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 opens the opening/closing door 38b when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning to the big winning opening 38a occurs. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again.
(7) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has one type of opening/closing execution mode.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 had an open/close execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times with the upper limit duration. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening and closing execution mode different from these regarding the form of the upper limit duration time and the number of round game executions. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to set a plurality of types of opening and closing execution modes by varying the form of the upper limit duration time. may be configured to set a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes by making the . Furthermore, the form of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact form of the upper limit duration is different, although the form appears to be the same from the player's point of view.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. , and the selection rate may be changed according to the game result.
(9) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, and uses the type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win for the occurrence of the big win. On the other hand, when a big win occurs, the MPU 62 may use the random number counter C1 for the lottery for the type of the big win. In this case, the winning type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter area 64a of the RAM64.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player by setting the support mode. By doing so, a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and disadvantageous game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the reservation information related to the upper working opening 36 in the first result display section reservation area Ra, and stores the reservation information related to the lower working opening 37 in the second result display section. By storing in the reserved area Rb, the reserved information regarding the upper working port 36 and the reserved information regarding the lower working port 37 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information relating to the upper working opening 36 and the holding information relating to the lower working opening 37 together.
(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the lower operation opening 37 for completing the game round regardless of whether or not there is the reservation information related to the upper operation opening 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 for completion of the game cycle in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command resulting from analysis of the command to the display control device 100. The control of the display control device 100 was executed by. In response to this, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 90, thereby performing sound emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The commands sent from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(14) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60 .

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the effects for game rounds are not limited to the effects described in the above embodiments, and are optional. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 and the pattern display device 51 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of light-emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 51 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game round effect by combining these decorative members and light emitting means with the pattern display device 51 to operate.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and sorting lottery) based on the winning to the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, and then the main display section 45 And the symbol display device 51 executes the variable display, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37 as the result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the start of the variable display may display the results of In this case, after starting the variable display, before stopping the variable display, an internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the pattern, and displays the result of the internal lottery as a result of stopping the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may be made unidentifiable.
Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display section 45 .

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the symbol display device 51 may execute an effect for the game round on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 51 may set a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in the predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variably displayed or may not be displayed during the variably displayed symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may employ letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish, or may employ a combination of these. In addition, even if characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify are not used, mutually similar patterns or combinations thereof may be used to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the manager of the game parlor, for example, looks at the pattern display device 51 without looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round, in the same way as in the case of winning a big win lottery. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of .

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a game machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at the , and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player accessing the website and entering the password issued by operating the button etc. provided on the gaming machine into the gaming machine. You may

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been exemplified and explained as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine of another type different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured such that when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Also, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or other types of gaming machines such as majang ball machines.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described below. Of the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions. Modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic group A> Characteristic A1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
The game state is
A first game state (low frequency support mode) having a normal mode and a special mode game mode;
A second game state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
In the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, the game state transition means selects one of the first game state and the second game state based on the result of the internal lottery. , and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, the first game state and the second game The game state is shifted to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery. Even when the game state is shifted to , the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts from a normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. The game state is changed, and when the game state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is changed to either the first game state or the second game state. game machine.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
In the first gaming state, the probability of entering the first starting ball entering section is higher than in the second starting ball entering section, and in the second gaming state, the probability is higher than the first starting ball entering section. A game machine characterized in that a game state more advantageous to the player than in the first game state is achieved by increasing the probability of a ball entering the second start ball-entering portion.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the probability that a ball enters the first starting ball entering section is higher in the first gaming state than in the second starting ball entering section, and the second gaming state corresponds to the first starting ball entering section. Since the probability that a ball enters the second starting ball entering part is higher than that of the ball entering part, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entering part in the first game state, and shoots the game ball at the second starting ball entering part. In the game state, the game ball is shot aiming at the second start ball entry part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in feature A3 of the invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable entry mechanism) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when a game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is determined by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed at the time of the game.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the first starting ball entering section Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the ball, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second game state. It will be.
Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4 of the invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to feature A6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds is completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6 of the invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the game state transition means,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high-frequency support mode while playing the game.

However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature B Group> Feature B1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
The game state is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode);
A second game state (high-frequency support mode) more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The result of the internal lottery is
A first lottery result (low frequency support mode result) for shifting the game state to either the first game state or the second game state;
and a second lottery result (high-frequency support mode result) for shifting the game state to the second game state.

According to feature B1 of the present invention group, the results of the internal lottery are the first lottery result that shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state, and the game to the second game state. Since the game machine is provided with the second lottery result for shifting the state, the gaming machine can shift the game state to the second game state even when the first lottery result is obtained. It is possible to increase the chance of shifting the game state to the game state of . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
The first gaming state is
A normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the first game state when the first lottery result is obtained;
and a special mode for shifting the game state to the second game state when the first lottery result is obtained.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the first game state is the normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the first game state when the first lottery result is obtained, and the first lottery result. Since there is a special mode in which the game state is shifted to the second game state when the game state is changed, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the first game state. and play. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B2 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts from a normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. The game state is changed, and when the game state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is changed to either the first game state or the second game state. game machine.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
In the first gaming state, the probability of entering the first starting ball entering section is higher than in the second starting ball entering section, and in the second gaming state, the probability is higher than the first starting ball entering section. A game machine characterized in that a game state more advantageous to the player than in the first game state is achieved by increasing the probability of a ball entering the second start ball-entering portion.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, the probability that a ball enters the first starting ball entering section is higher in the first gaming state than in the second starting ball entering section, and the second gaming state is the first starting ball entering section. Since the probability that a ball enters the second starting ball entering part is higher than that of the ball entering part, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entering part in the first game state, and shoots the game ball at the second starting ball entering part. In the game state, the game ball is shot aiming at the second start ball entry part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in feature B4 of the invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable entry mechanism) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when a game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is determined by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed at the time of the game.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the first starting ball entering section. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the ball, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second game state. It will be.
Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B5 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to feature B6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B5 of the present invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to feature B7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B7 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode.

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B7 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game state to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the game state shift means,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to feature B9 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player plays in anticipation of transition to the high-frequency support mode.

However, since the transition destinations of the first game state and the second game state are associated with the result of the internal lottery, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic group C> Characteristic C1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
The game state is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode);
A second game state (high-frequency support mode) more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The first gaming state is
normal mode and
a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode;
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the special mode when the game state is shifted to the first game state, and the normal mode when the game state is shifted to the second game state. A game machine characterized by shifting the game mode to.

According to feature C1 of the present invention group, the first game state includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of transitioning to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode, and the game state transition means includes: When the game state is shifted to the first game state, the game mode is shifted to the special mode, and when the game state is shifted to the second game state, the game mode is shifted to the normal mode. Even when the game state is shifted to the first game state, the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts from a normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. The game state is changed, and when the game state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is changed to either the first game state or the second game state. game machine.

According to feature C2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C2 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
In the first gaming state, the probability of entering the first starting ball entering section is higher than in the second starting ball entering section, and in the second gaming state, the probability is higher than the first starting ball entering section. A game machine characterized in that a game state more advantageous for the player than the first game state is achieved by increasing the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball-entering portion.

According to feature C3 of the present invention group, the probability that a ball enters the first starting ball entering section is higher in the first gaming state than in the second starting ball entering section, and the second gaming state corresponds to the first starting ball entering section. Since the probability that a ball enters the second starting ball entering part is higher than that of the ball entering part, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entering part in the first game state, and shoots the game ball at the second starting ball entering part. In the game state, the game ball is shot aiming at the second start ball entry part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in feature C3 of the invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable entry mechanism) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when a game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is determined by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed at the time of the game.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the first starting ball entering section Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the game ball, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second game state. It will be.
Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4 of the invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to feature C6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the predetermined number of game rounds is completed after the game mode is shifted to the special mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the game state transition means,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to feature C8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player plays in anticipation of transition to the high-frequency support mode.

However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature D Group> Feature D1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
The game state is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode);
A second game state (high-frequency support mode) more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The first gaming state is
normal mode and
a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode;
The game state transition means includes normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery to determine whether to transition the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to feature D1 of the present invention group, the first game state includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode. Even when the game state is shifted to the first game state, the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. Since the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts from a normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. The game state is changed, and when the game state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is changed to either the first game state or the second game state. game machine.

According to feature D2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means changes the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D2 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
In the first gaming state, the probability of entering the first starting ball entering section is higher than in the second starting ball entering section, and in the second gaming state, the probability is higher than the first starting ball entering section. A game machine characterized in that a game state more advantageous for the player than the first game state is achieved by increasing the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball-entering portion.

According to feature D3 of the present invention group, in the first gaming state, the probability of entering the first starting ball entering section is higher than in the second starting ball entering section. Since the probability that a ball enters the second starting ball entering part is higher than that of the ball entering part, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entering part in the first game state, and shoots the game ball at the second starting ball entering part. In the game state, the game ball is shot aiming at the second start ball entry part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D3 of the invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable entry mechanism) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when a game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is determined by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed at the time of the game.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the first starting ball entering section. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the game ball, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second game state. It will be.
Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player plays in anticipation of transition to the high-frequency support mode.

However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature group E> Feature E1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
The game state is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode);
a second game state (high-frequency support mode) that continues until the end reference number of game rounds is completed and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state;
The game state transition means shifts from a normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. After the state is changed and the game state is changed to the second game state, the number of times the game cycle is completed until the game state is changed to the specific control state is set to a number smaller than the end reference number of times. Based on the result of comparison with the threshold value, an advantageous side game situation (50 times special mode) that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous side game situation (30 times special mode) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side game situation ) and a gaming machine characterized by being distributed to.

According to feature E1 of the present invention group, the game state transition means includes the number of times of completion of game rounds and the end reference number of times until the game state is shifted to the specific control state after the game state is shifted to the second game state. Based on the result of comparison with a threshold value set to a smaller number of times, the game is sorted into an advantageous game situation that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game situation that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous game situation. The player pays attention to the number of times the game cycle is completed until the game state is changed to the specific control state after the game state is changed to the second game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means sets a number of times smaller than the number of completed game rounds until the game state is shifted to the specific control state after the game state is shifted to the second game state, and the end reference number of times. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the game is smaller than the threshold, it is sorted to the advantageous game situation, and when it is larger than the threshold, it is sorted to the disadvantageous game situation.

According to feature E2 of the group of the present inventions, the game state transition means includes the number of times of completion of game rounds and the end reference number of times after the game state is shifted to the second game state until the game state is shifted to the specific control state. is compared with a threshold set to a number of times smaller than the threshold, and if it is smaller than this threshold, the game state is assigned to the advantage side game state, so the player, after shifting the game state to the second game state, can complete the end reference number of times. Attention will be paid to game rounds up to a threshold set to a number smaller than . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E2 of the invention group,
The first gaming state is
normal mode and
a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode;
The game state shifting means shifts the game mode to one of the normal mode and the special mode when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state.

According to feature E3 of the present invention group, the first game state includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal mode. Even when the game state is shifted to the first game state, the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. We will pay attention to whether or not Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in feature E3 of the invention group,
The game state transition means transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode,
The special mode is
the advantageous side game situation in which the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed;
A gaming machine characterized by having the disadvantageous side game situation in which the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game rounds less than a predetermined number is completed.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the predetermined number of game rounds is completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. In addition, in the disadvantageous side game situation, the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game rounds less than the predetermined number of times is completed, so the game situation is disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous side game situation. can be Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in feature E3 of the invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the game state transition means,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won,
The special mode is
the advantageous side gaming situation with a low probability of winning the normal mode lottery;
A game machine characterized by having the above-mentioned disadvantageous side game situation with a high probability of winning the above-mentioned normal mode lottery.

According to feature E5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Also, since the probability of winning the normal mode lottery is high in the disadvantageous game situation, the game situation can be made disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous game situation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E3 to feature E5 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to feature E6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E3 to feature E5 of the present invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to feature E7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E7 of the present invention group,
The game state shifting means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Amusement machine.

According to feature E8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in feature E8 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
In the first gaming state, the probability of entering the first starting ball entering section is higher than in the second starting ball entering section, and in the second gaming state, the probability is higher than the first starting ball entering section. A game machine characterized in that a game state more advantageous for the player than the first game state is achieved by increasing the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball-entering portion.

According to feature E9 of the present invention group, the probability that a ball enters the first start ball entry section is higher in the first game state than in the second start ball entry section, and the second game state is the first start ball entry section. Since the probability that a ball enters the second starting ball entering part is higher than that of the ball entering part, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entering part in the first game state, and shoots the game ball at the second starting ball entering part. In the game state, the game ball is shot aiming at the second start ball entry part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature E10.
In the gaming machine described in feature E9 of the invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable entry mechanism) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when a game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is determined by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed at the time of the game.

According to the feature E10 of the present invention group, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the first starting ball entering section Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the game ball, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second game state. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group E of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player plays in anticipation of transition to the high-frequency support mode.

However, the second gaming state continues until the end reference number of game rounds is completed, and the gaming machine, regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot lottery in the second gaming state, based on the result of the internal lottery, Since the game state is shifted, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Feature group F> Feature F1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable ball entry mechanism 40) that allows a game ball to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game state is
A first time-saving state (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable entry mechanism makes it easier to enter,
A second time-saving state (special mode low frequency support mode) in which it is difficult to enter the ball with the variable ball entry mechanism compared to the first time-saving state,
The game state shifting means shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism. .

According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the gaming state is a first time-saving state in which the variable ball-entering mechanism is easy to enter, and the variable ball-entering mechanism is more difficult to enter than the first time-saving state. Since the second time-saving state is provided, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism. can. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part,
The variable ball entry mechanism allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the player shoots the game ball toward the second path in the first time-saving state, and the game ball toward the first path in the second time-saving state. will be fired. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 or feature F2 of the present invention group,
The game state is
A first game state (low frequency support mode) having a game mode of the normal mode and the second time saving state as a special mode;
A second game state (high-frequency support mode) more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
In the normal mode of the first game state and in the second game state, the game state transition means selects one of the first game state and the second game state based on the result of the internal lottery. , and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, the first game state and the second game The game state is shifted to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery. Even when the game state is shifted to , the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F4.
In the game machine described in feature F3 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and the specific control A gaming machine characterized in that the game state is shifted to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the normal control state to the normal control state.

According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F5.
In the game machine described in feature F3 or feature F4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to feature F5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F6.
In the game machine described in feature F3 or feature F4 of the present invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F7.
In the game machine described in feature F3 or feature F4 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode.

According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F8.
In the game machine described in feature F3 or feature F4 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the game state transition means,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when winning the normal mode lottery, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the feature group F of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player plays in anticipation of transition to the high-frequency support mode.

In addition, as one type of such gaming machine, a game equipped with a variable ball entry mechanism that allows a game ball to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. machine is known.
This game machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game state transition means is provided for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
The high-frequency support mode is more advantageous for the player than the first game state because it becomes easier for the player to enter the variable ball-entering mechanism.

However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature G Group> Feature G1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10 ) and
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part,
The game state is
A first time-saving state (high-frequency support mode) that is advantageous to the player by shooting the game ball toward the second path;
A second time-saving state (low-frequency support mode of a special mode) in which the player is in a disadvantageous situation compared to the first time-saving state by shooting the game ball toward the second path. prepared,
The game machine is
A variable ball entry mechanism (right side variable Equipped with a ball entry mechanism 40),
The game state shifting means shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism. .

According to the feature G1 of the present invention group, the game state is a first time-saving state in which the player is in an advantageous situation by shooting the game ball toward the second path, and the second path. By shooting the game ball in the second time-saving state in which the player is in a disadvantageous situation compared to the first time-saving state, when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism It is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means terminates the second time saving state when a game ball is shot toward the second path during stay in the second time saving state. .

According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means ends the second time saving state when a game ball is shot toward the second path during stay in the second time saving state. , the player shoots the game ball toward the second path in the first time-saving state, and shoots the game ball toward the first path in the second time-saving state. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 or feature G2 of the invention group,
The game state is
A first game state (low frequency support mode) having a game mode of the normal mode and the second time saving state as a special mode;
A second game state (high-frequency support mode) more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
In the normal mode of the first game state and in the second game state, the game state transition means selects one of the first game state and the second game state based on the result of the internal lottery. , and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, the first game state and the second game The game state is shifted to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery. Even when the game state is shifted to , the player expects to stay in the special mode while playing the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 of the invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and the specific control A gaming machine characterized in that the game state is shifted to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the normal control state to the normal control state.

According to feature G4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not the player stays in the special mode when the transition is made to the first game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 or feature G4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Amusement machine.

According to feature G5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means selects either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 or feature G4 of the present invention group,
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode) that executes a special mode lottery to determine whether to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. game machine.

According to feature G6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 or feature G4 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode.

According to the feature G7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game rounds are completed after the game mode is shifted to the special mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G8.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 or feature G4 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (fluctuation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the game state transition means,
The gaming machine, wherein the game state transition means transitions the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to feature G8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group G of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player plays in anticipation of transition to the high-frequency support mode.

In addition, as one type of such gaming machine, a game equipped with a variable ball entry mechanism that allows a game ball to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. machine is known.
This game machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game state transition means is provided for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
The high-frequency support mode is more advantageous for the player than the first game state because it becomes easier for the player to enter the variable ball-entering mechanism.

However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.
<Others>
Conventionally, a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2011-235036).
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the game state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the game state has a low-frequency support mode (first game state) and a high-frequency support mode (second game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player plays in anticipation of transition to the high-frequency support mode.
In addition, as one type of such gaming machine, a game equipped with a variable ball entry mechanism that allows a game ball to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. machine is known.
This game machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game state transition means is provided for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
The high-frequency support mode is more advantageous for the player than the first game state because it becomes easier for the player to enter the variable ball-entering mechanism.
However, when the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, the player must play in the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of the player to the game.
<Means>
The gaming machine of this technical concept comprises a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball entering the game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game ball. and game state transition means for shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery, wherein the start ball entry means comprises a first start ball entry section and a second Equipped with a second starting ball-entering part different from the first starting ball-entering part, the game area easily causes the game ball to enter the first starting ball-entering part, and the game ball to enter the second starting ball-entering part. A first route that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter, and a second route that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the second starting ball entering section and makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entering section. The game state is a first time-saving state in which the player is in an advantageous situation by shooting the game ball toward the second path, and the game ball is shot toward the second path. By doing so, the game machine is provided with a second time-saving state that is a disadvantageous situation for the player compared to the first time-saving state, and the gaming machine has an internal state executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. A variable ball entry mechanism is provided for allowing the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of the lottery, and the game state transition means is adapted to control the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry mechanism. It is characterized in that the game state is shifted from the normal control state to the specific control state that is advantageous for the player.
<effect>
According to this technical idea, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

10... Pachinko machine 35... General winning opening 36... Upper operating opening 37... Lower operating opening 38... Variable winning device 38a... Large winning opening 38b... Open/close door 38c... Variable winning driving section 39... Out Mouth 40 Right variable entry mechanism 51 Symbol display device 60 Main controller 62 MPU
90... Sound emission control device, 92... MPU, 100... Display control device, 102... MPU.

Claims (1)

A launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. and game state transition means for shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry section;
A second start-up ball entry section different from the first start-up ball entry section,
The game area is
A first path that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entering portion and makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting ball entering portion;
a second path that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering part;
The game state is
A first time-saving state in which the player is in an advantageous situation by shooting the game ball toward the second path;
A second time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the first time-saving state by shooting a game ball toward the second path,
The game machine is
A variable ball entry mechanism that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game state shifting means shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.

Images